WO2021036898A1 - Application activation method for apparatus having foldable screen, and related device - Google Patents
Application activation method for apparatus having foldable screen, and related device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021036898A1 WO2021036898A1 PCT/CN2020/110198 CN2020110198W WO2021036898A1 WO 2021036898 A1 WO2021036898 A1 WO 2021036898A1 CN 2020110198 W CN2020110198 W CN 2020110198W WO 2021036898 A1 WO2021036898 A1 WO 2021036898A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- application
- electronic device
- angle
- display screen
- flexible display
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F9/00—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
- G06F9/06—Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
- G06F9/44—Arrangements for executing specific programs
- G06F9/445—Program loading or initiating
- G06F9/44505—Configuring for program initiating, e.g. using registry, configuration files
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular to a method for opening an application in a folding screen device and related devices.
- flexible display screens are more flexible and foldable.
- the folding screen device because it is equipped with a flexible display screen, the flexible display screen can be switched between a folded form and an unfolded form, so that the folding screen device can switch between partial display and full-screen display.
- the folding screen device can launch an application on the flexible display screen in response to the user's operation.
- some applications often take a long time to start. For example, game applications and video playback applications often start slowly, which affects user experience.
- the flexible display screen of the folding screen device is switched from the folded form to the unfolded form, the position of the application icon displayed on the flexible display screen may change. In this way, it is not conducive for the user to find the application icon and open the application, which reduces the convenience of operation.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a method and related device for opening an application in a folding screen device, which can realize that the application is started in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. In this way, the time taken by the application startup after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form is reduced, and the convenience of application startup is improved.
- an embodiment of the present application provides an application opening method, which is applied to an electronic device including a flexible display screen, and the method includes: the flexible display screen of the electronic device is in a folded configuration; the electronic device detects The flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time during which the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold; the electronic device starts the first application or the electronic device starts the first capability .
- the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is stopped at a first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the first application or starts the first capability. In this way, it is possible to pre-launch the application or pre-launch the capability before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken by the application or ability to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device. In addition, there is no need for the user to manually operate to start the application or the ability, which improves the convenience of starting the application and the ability.
- the electronic device starts the B game application.
- the electronic device can use the time of the unfolding process to complete the start of the B game application after the flexible display is unfolded to the unfolded form, which reduces the time taken for the B game application to start after the flexible display is in the unfolded form, and promotes the use of folding screen devices Experience.
- the electronic device can calculate the opening angle of the flexible display screen through the detection data of the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor.
- the electronic device can also determine that the flexible display screen is in a folded form according to the opening angle. For example, when the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 0° ⁇ 3°, it is determined that the flexible display screen is in a folded form.
- the first time threshold may be determined by the electronic device for multiple times when the user is held at an opening angle of the flexible display screen, and then determined according to the collected times.
- the electronic device activating the first application includes: the electronic device activating the first application, and displaying the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen Or partial display.
- the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar.
- the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the electronic device if the first application has been run in the background before being expanded to the first angle, the electronic device does not need to start the first application, and displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen.
- the method further includes: when detecting that the flexible display screen is in an unfolded configuration, the electronic device The user interface is displayed in full screen or partially on the flexible display screen.
- the electronic device When the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, it starts the first application and displays the user interface of the first application. In this way, it is possible to pre-start the application and display before the flexible display is opened to the unfolded form. Display the user interface of the application. This reduces the time taken for application startup and display after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device.
- the method further includes: the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded by a second angle, and the flexible display screen is at the The second angle pause time is greater than or equal to a second time threshold; wherein, the second angle is greater than the first angle, and the second time threshold is the same as or different from the first time threshold; the electronic device Start a second application, the second application is different from the first application, or start a second capability, the second capability is different from the first capability.
- the method further includes: the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen, And running the first application in the background; or the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
- the first application and the second application are started in advance. In this way, the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form can be reduced. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the icons of the first application and the second application, which improves the convenience of application startup.
- the electronic device may use the first application running in the background to display the user interface of the first application without restarting the first application.
- the first application running in the background may be closed.
- the method further includes : The electronic device displays first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the first application is running in the background.
- the electronic device may also display a close control for closing the first application running in the background.
- the electronic device may also display a hidden control for hiding the closing control and/or the first prompt information.
- the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen, which may include the following two solutions:
- the electronic device displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen in separate screens.
- the user can operate the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application, and the electronic device can respond.
- the first application is a gallery application
- the electronic device may display a picture corresponding to the thumbnail.
- the electronic device overlays and displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen.
- the electronic device may display the user interface of the first application in full screen.
- the flexible display screen may be in an unlocked state in the folded configuration.
- the flexible display screen of the electronic device may also be in a locked screen state in the folded configuration.
- the electronic device detects that the pause time of the flexible display at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may start the first application.
- the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface of the first application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the first application.
- the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters) to be unlocked to display the main screen interface.
- the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded configuration at a first angle; and the time during which the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to After the first time threshold and before the electronic device starts the first application, the method further includes: the electronic device determines a first angle interval corresponding to the first angle; and the electronic device determines the interval between the angle interval and the application according to the angle interval. To determine the first application corresponding to the first angle interval.
- the electronic device can give a prompt when the flexible display screen is unfolded to a certain angle. For example, when the opening angle is in the first angle interval, the electronic device may generate a vibration prompt. When the opening angle falls within the next angle interval, the electronic device generates a vibration prompt again to remind the user of the current opening angle.
- the method further includes: the electronic device displays a first user interface, the first user interface includes an angle interval setting entrance; after entering the angle interval setting entrance, according to user operations , Set the corresponding application for each angle interval.
- the angle interval may be adjustable according to user operations.
- the angle interval setting entry includes a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- the first user interface may further include a control for adding an angle interval setting entry.
- the first user interface further includes a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein, the first switch is used to automatically turn on the most frequently activated switch according to the activation frequency of the application. Application; or the second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
- the application with the most startup frequency may be an application with the startup frequency or times of the application in a full-screen display scenario, or it may be an application that does not distinguish between full-screen or partial display.
- the most frequently launched application can be updated in real time or periodically.
- the electronic device may determine the number of applications with the most frequent startup frequency to be automatically started according to the occupancy of running memory.
- the first capability includes any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
- the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device may not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It is also possible not to ring when the notification message of the application is received. When adjusted to the silent mode, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
- the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
- the method further includes: the electronic device displays second prompt information, and the second prompt information is used to prompt the electronic device The first ability has been activated.
- the electronic device may also display a second control for turning off the first ability.
- the electronic device may also display a hidden control for hiding the second control and/or the second prompt information.
- an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: a flexible display screen, an acceleration sensor, a gyroscope sensor, one or more processors, and one or more memories: the flexible display screen, the acceleration The sensor, the gyroscope sensor, and the one or more memories are respectively coupled with the one or more processors; the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor are used to detect data so that the one or more The processor detects the opening angle of the flexible display screen; the flexible display screen is in a folded state; the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions; the processor is used to call The computer instructions perform the following operations: detecting that the flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time during which the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold; An application or, the first ability is activated.
- the electronic device provided by the second aspect detects that the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the first application or starts the first capability. In this way, it is possible to pre-launch the application or pre-launch the capability before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken by the application or ability to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device. In addition, there is no need for the user to manually operate to start the application or the ability, which improves the convenience of starting the application and the ability.
- the processor is specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: start a first application, and display the user interface of the first application in full screen or partially.
- the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar.
- the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: when it is detected that the flexible display screen is in an expanded configuration, The electronic device displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen or partially.
- the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: detect that the flexible display screen is expanded at a second angle, and The flexible display screen pauses at the second angle for a time greater than or equal to the second time threshold; wherein, the second angle is greater than the first angle, and the second time threshold is the same as the first time threshold Same or different; start a second application, which is different from the first application, or start a second capability, which is different from the first capability.
- the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display the user interface of the second application in the flexible Display on the display screen, and run the first application in the background; or the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
- the processor after the processor displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen and runs the first application in the background, the processor further It is used for calling the computer instruction to perform the following operations: displaying first prompt information, the first prompt information being used for prompting that the first application has been running in the background.
- the processor is specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display The on-screen split-screen display; or the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application are displayed in a layered manner on the flexible display screen.
- the flexible display screen of the electronic device may also be in a locked screen state in the folded configuration.
- the electronic device detects that the pause time of the flexible display at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may start the first application.
- the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface of the first application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the first application.
- the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters) to be unlocked to display the main screen interface.
- the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: determine the first angle interval corresponding to the first angle; according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application , Determining the first application corresponding to the first angle interval.
- the processor detects that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded configuration to a first angle; and the time that the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to Before the first time threshold, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display a first user interface on the flexible display screen, the first user interface including an angle interval setting entry; enter the After setting the entrance of the angle interval, according to the user's operation, set the corresponding application for each angle interval.
- the angle interval setting entry includes a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- the first user interface further includes a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein, the first switch is used to automatically turn on the most frequently-started application according to the startup frequency of the application. Application; or the second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
- the first capability includes any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
- the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device may not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It is also possible not to ring when the notification message of the application is received. When adjusted to the silent mode, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
- the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
- the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations:
- the embodiments of the present application provide a chip that is applied to an electronic device.
- the chip includes one or more processors for invoking computer instructions to make the electronic device execute the first aspect and the first aspect.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions.
- the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the first aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners in the first aspect. Described method.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when the instructions are executed on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the first aspect and any possible implementation manner in the first aspect Described method.
- the electronic equipment provided in the second aspect, the chip provided in the third aspect, the computer program product provided in the fourth aspect, and the computer storage medium provided in the fifth aspect provided above are all used to execute the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application. method. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, which will not be repeated here.
- FIGS. 1a to 1d are schematic diagrams of the structure of a flexible display screen in a folding screen device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
- FIGS. 2-9 are schematic diagrams of some application interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application of a folding screen device according to an embodiment of the present application
- FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 is a block diagram of the software structure of an electronic device 100 exemplarily provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a method for opening an application according to an opening angle of a flexible display screen provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIGS. 1a to 1d are schematic structural diagrams of a flexible display screen in a folding screen device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the flexible display screen can include A screen and B screen.
- the A screen and the B screen are connected by bending parts.
- the A screen and the B screen can be folded in half through the bending part. Taking the folded form as a reference state, the angle at which the plane where the A screen is located and the plane where the B screen is located rotates around the bending part as the axis can be called the opening angle of the flexible display screen.
- the opening angle of the flexible display screen may be between 0° and 180°, and may also be between 0° and 360°.
- the flexible display screen may include at least two physical forms: an expanded form, a folded form, and a bracket form.
- the flexible display screen shown in Figure 1a is in an unfolded form.
- the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 180° ⁇ . That is, the A screen and the B screen are in the same plane, and the A screen and the B screen are spread out and distributed.
- the A screen and the B screen form a continuous display area through the bending part.
- the electronic device can be displayed in the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen. In this state, the electronic device is displayed in full screen.
- ⁇ is a non-negative angle value, for example, 2°, 0°.
- the full-screen display described in the following text refers to the display of the electronic device in the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen when the flexible display screen is in an unfolded form.
- the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar.
- the flexible display screens shown in Figures 1b and 1c are in a folded form.
- the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 0°+ ⁇ , for example, the opening angle is 0°.
- ⁇ is a non-negative angle value, for example, 3°, 0°.
- the electronic device can perform partial display. Illustratively, it can only be displayed on the A screen, and the B screen can not be displayed on the screen.
- the plane where the A screen is located is parallel to the plane where the B screen is located, and the A screen and the B screen are superimposed.
- the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
- the opening angle of the flexible display screen can also be 360°- ⁇ .
- ⁇ is a non-negative angle value, for example, 1°, 0°.
- the opening angle of the flexible display screen shown in Fig. 1d is ⁇ .
- the opening angle is the angle that the plane where the A screen is located and the plane where the screen B is located in the folded position shown in FIG. 1b as the reference state, and rotates with the bending part as the axis.
- the state before the flexible display screen deviates from the folded state and unfolded to the unfolded state may be referred to as the bracket state.
- the example shown in Fig. 1d shows an example of a stent form.
- the value range of the opening angle ⁇ may include ⁇ 180°- ⁇ , for example, the opening angle ⁇ may include 30°, 45°, 90°, 150°, etc. in the stent form.
- the value range of the opening angle ⁇ may also include 180°+ ⁇ 360°- ⁇ .
- the opening angle ⁇ in the stent form may also include 195°, 225°, 300°, 350°, and so on.
- the electronic device when it is detected that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device can determine that the flexible display screen has been opened at the position where the opening angle is the first angle. pause.
- the physical form of the flexible display when the opening angle is the first angle may be a bracket form. The following describes an example of determining the first time threshold.
- the first time threshold may be greater than or equal to 0.3 seconds.
- the average time consumed in the process of expanding the flexible display screen from the folded form to the unfolded form can be obtained through user operation statistics.
- the first time threshold may be less than the average time. Specifically, the time consumed by each of the N testers for M expansion processes can be counted, and the average time consumed by the N*M expansion processes can be calculated to obtain the average time, for example, the average time is 1.5 seconds. Then the first time threshold may be less than or equal to 1.5 seconds.
- the value range of the first time threshold can be set to [0.3s, 1.5s], for example, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds. It is not limited to the foregoing value range, and the first time threshold may also be another value, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the first time threshold may also be determined by the electronic device through multiple collections of the time that the user maintains at one opening angle of the flexible display screen, and then determined according to the collected multiple times.
- a prompt may be displayed: "Please expand the mobile phone from the folded state to the expanded state, and stop midway through the expansion.”
- the electronic device can collect the pause time during the pause during the unfolding process.
- the electronic device may collect multiple pause times, and then determine the average value of the multiple pause times as the first time threshold.
- the electronic device when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded configuration, can open the application according to the opening angle in the bracket configuration or adjust the opening angle according to the opening angle in the bracket configuration when the bracket configuration stops during the process of unfolding the flexible screen System configuration (for example, adjusting the system configuration to power saving mode).
- the following embodiments of the application provide a method for opening an application in a folding screen device and related devices.
- the electronic device may store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval of the flexible display screen and the application.
- the mapping relationship includes that the first angle interval corresponds to the first application.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle.
- the electronic device may acquire the angle interval in which the first angle is located, which is the first angle interval. According to the mapping relationship between the first angle interval and the first application, the first application is started.
- the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds
- the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application stored in the electronic device includes: 90°-135° corresponding to the B game application.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at 120° for more than 0.5 seconds
- the electronic device obtains the first angle of 120° in the angle range of 90° to 135°, and then starts the B game application according to the mapping relationship.
- the application interface of the B game application can be displayed in full screen.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the application corresponding to the angle interval where the first angle is located.
- the application can be started in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form.
- the user does not need to manually touch the application icon to start the application, which improves the convenience of starting the application.
- the physical form of the flexible display screen of the electronic device is a folded form, and the electronic device can partially display the application interface 10.
- the application interface 10 is taken as the main screen interface 10 as an example for introduction.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the A screen of the electronic device 100 displays the main screen interface 10.
- the main screen interface 10 includes a calendar widget 101, a weather widget 102, an application icon 103, a status bar 104 and a navigation bar 105. among them:
- the calendar widget 101 can be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and so on.
- the weather widget 102 can be used to indicate the type of weather, such as cloudy to clear, light rain, etc., can also be used to indicate information such as temperature, and can also be used to indicate a location.
- the application icon 103 may include, for example, the icon of Wechat, the icon of Twitter, the icon of Facebook (Facebook), the icon of Weibo (Sina Weibo), the icon of QQ (Tencent QQ), the icon of Youtu ( The icon of YouTube), the icon of Gallery (Gallery), etc., may also include icons of other applications, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Any application icon can be used to respond to a user's operation, such as a touch operation, so that the electronic device starts the application corresponding to the icon.
- the status bar 104 may include the name of the operator (for example, China Mobile), time, WI-FI icon, signal strength, and current remaining power.
- the navigation bar 105 may include system navigation keys such as a return button 1051, a home screen button 1052, and a call out task history button 1053.
- the main screen interface 10 is an interface displayed after the electronic device 100 detects a user operation on the main interface button 1052 on any user interface. When it is detected that the user clicks the return button 1051, the electronic device 100 may display the previous user interface of the current user interface. When it is detected that the user clicks the main interface button 1052, the electronic device 100 may display the main screen interface 10. When it is detected that the user clicks on the outgoing task history button 1053, the electronic device 100 may display the task recently opened by the first user.
- the naming of each navigation key can also be other. For example, 1051 can be called Back Button, 1052 can be called Home button, and 1053 can be called Menu Button, which is not limited in this application.
- the navigation keys in the navigation bar 105 are not limited to virtual keys, and can also be implemented as physical keys.
- the electronic device When the flexible display screen of the electronic device is unfolded from the folded form, the electronic device can obtain the opening angle.
- the electronic device may store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application.
- Table 1 is an example of the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle.
- the electronic device can obtain the angle interval in which the first angle is located. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 0° ⁇ 45°, the electronic device can start the microblog according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1.
- the electronic device can start the A game according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 90° ⁇ 135°, the electronic device can start the gallery application according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 135° ⁇ 179°, the electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1.
- the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds. Based on Table 1, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle ⁇ of the flexible display screen is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds at 110°, the electronic device determines that the angle interval of 110° is 90°-135°. As shown in (B) of FIG. 2, the electronic device starts the gallery application according to the angle range of 90° to 135° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1, and displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen on screens A and B. In some embodiments of the present application, if the gallery application has been running in the background, the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen on the A screen and the B screen.
- the user interface 20 of the gallery application may include a thumbnail display area 201, and the thumbnail display area 201 may include thumbnails of multiple pictures. The user can touch the thumbnail to open the corresponding picture.
- the electronic device when the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the first angle is 180°, the electronic device can display the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen. In this way, it is possible to start the gallery application in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the expanded form. This reduces the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the gallery application icon to start the application, which improves the convenience of starting the application.
- the electronic device can activate the multiple angles
- the application corresponding to the interval, and the interface of the last launched application is displayed in the foreground.
- the application that is started first may be the first application
- the application that is started later may be the second application.
- the second application is different from the first application.
- the second application is the Youtu application and the first application is the gallery application.
- the time thresholds set for the two angles that are paused successively may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device may set the first time threshold for the previous angle.
- the electronic device can set a second time threshold.
- the first time threshold and the second time threshold are both 0.5 seconds, and for another example, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds, and the second time threshold is 0.6 seconds.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device starts the gallery application according to the angle range of 90° ⁇ 135° where the opening angle of 110° falls and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1.
- the user interface 20 of the gallery application is displayed in full screen on the display area composed of the screen and the B screen.
- the electronic device can detect the flexible display screen before the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form
- the opening angle ⁇ at 150° pause time is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds.
- the electronic device determines that the angle interval where the opening angle is 150° is 135° ⁇ 179°.
- the electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the angle range of 135° ⁇ 179° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1, and run the gallery application in the background, and display the Youtu user interface in full screen on the display area composed of screen A and screen B 30 .
- the background running of the gallery application means that the gallery application has been activated and has not been closed by the electronic device.
- the electronic device may use the gallery application running in the background to display the user interface 20 of the gallery application without restarting the gallery application.
- the user interface 30 of Youtu may include menu controls: Featured Menu 301, Anime Menu 302, Hotspot Menu 303, Episode Menu 304, Movie Menu 305, Children's Menu 306. Variety menu 307 and documentary menu 308.
- the user interface 30 may also include a content display area 3011. The content displayed in the content display area 3011 is the content under the selected menu 301.
- the user interface 30 may also include a search box 309 for displaying a list of videos related to the keyword in response to the keyword searched by the user in the search box 209.
- the search box 309 may also display popular search keywords by default, such as "Twelve Hours in Chang'an".
- the content display area 3011 may include a control 3011a, a control 3011b, a control 3011c, a control 3011d, a control 3011e, and a control 3011f, which are respectively used to make the electronic device display a video list corresponding to the control in response to a user's touch operation.
- the electronic device when the flexible display screen of the electronic device is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the opening angle ⁇ is 180°, the electronic device can display the user interface 30 of Youtu in full screen.
- the electronic device may also display a prompt interface 40, which includes a background running application icon 401, a close control 402, and a hidden control 403. among them:
- the application icon 401 is used to prompt a gallery application running in the background.
- the user can touch the application icon 401, so that the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application according to the gallery application running in the background in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the application icon 401.
- the application icon 401 is the first prompt message.
- the close control 402 is used to close the gallery application running in the background.
- the user can touch the close control 402, so that the electronic device closes the gallery application running in the background in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the close control 402.
- the hidden control 403 is used to hide the prompt interface 40.
- the user can touch the hidden control 403, so that the electronic device hides the prompt interface 40 in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the hidden control 403.
- the electronic device can still run the gallery application in the background.
- the gallery application and the Youtu application are activated in advance. In this way, the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form can be reduced. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the Youtu icon to start the Youtu application, which improves the convenience of application startup.
- the gallery application may be the first application
- the Youtu application may be the second application.
- the electronic device may start the first application in the background, such as a gallery application.
- the electronic device may start a second application in the background, such as the Youtu application.
- the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application (ie, the user interface 30 of Youtu) on the flexible display screen, which can be displayed in full screen or partially.
- the electronic device may also display the prompt interface 40.
- the gallery application running in the background may be closed.
- the electronic device can start this Applications corresponding to multiple angle intervals, and display the user interfaces of these multiple applications.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of some application interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
- the electronic device can detect that the opening angle ⁇ of the flexible display screen is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds before the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form. .
- the electronic device determines that the angle interval where the opening angle is 150° is 135° ⁇ 179°.
- the electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the angle range of 135° ⁇ 179° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1. As shown in (A) in FIG.
- the electronic device displays part or all of the user interface 20 of the gallery application (the user interface of the first application) and the user interface 30 of Youtu (the user interface of the second application) on the Flexible display.
- the user interface 20 of the gallery application and the user interface 30 of Youtu are displayed in a layered manner on the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen.
- the electronic device displays the user interface 30 of Youtu in full screen. Refer to the user interface 30 of Youtu as shown in FIG. 3 The example described in (B).
- the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery and the user interface 30 of Youtu on the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen in a split screen.
- the user can operate the user interface 20 and the user interface 30, and the electronic device can respond.
- the electronic device may display the picture corresponding to the thumbnail in the display area where the user interface 20 is located.
- the electronic device may display the video corresponding to the control in the display area where the user interface 30 is located.
- the electronic device when the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen pauses at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, the electronic device may only start the first application, such as a gallery application. When it is detected that the flexible display screen is in the expanded state, the electronic device displays the user interface of the first application (ie, the user interface 20 of the gallery) on the flexible display screen.
- the first application such as a gallery application.
- the user interface 20 that displays the gallery in full screen on the flexible display screen in FIG. 2, and may also be partially displayed on the flexible display screen.
- FIG. 4(C) an example of a partial display of the user interface 20 of the gallery on the flexible display screen is shown.
- the user interface 20 of the gallery may be displayed on the flexible display screen with the main screen interface 50.
- the upper split screen display is not limited to (C) the user interface 20 that displays the gallery in full screen on the flexible display screen in FIG. 2, and may also be partially displayed on the flexible display screen.
- FIG. 4(C) an example of a partial display of the user interface 20 of the gallery on the flexible display screen is shown.
- the user interface 20 of the gallery may be displayed on the flexible display screen with the main screen interface 50.
- the upper split screen display is not limited to (C) the user interface 20 that displays the gallery in full screen on the flexible display screen in FIG. 2, and may also be partially displayed on the flexible display screen.
- the situation that does not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar can be referred to as partial display.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display mode of the partial display.
- the electronic device can start the system configuration corresponding to the multiple angle intervals successively, and Use the last-on system configuration.
- the system configuration that is turned on first may be the first ability
- the system configuration that is turned on later may be the second ability.
- the second ability is different from the first ability.
- the second ability is a power saving mode
- the first ability is a silent mode.
- the time thresholds set for the two angles that are paused successively may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device may set the first time threshold for the previous angle.
- the electronic device can set a second time threshold.
- the first time threshold and the second time threshold are both 0.45 seconds, and for another example, the first time threshold is 0.4 seconds, and the second time threshold is 0.7 seconds.
- the flexible display screen of the electronic device can also be in a locked state in the folded form, that is, the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters). Unlock to display the main screen interface 10. If the electronic device is in the locked screen state in the folded configuration, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle ⁇ is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds at the 110° pause time, the electronic device can start the gallery application. When the flexible display screen is expanded into an expanded form, the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface 20 of the gallery application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the gallery application.
- the electronic device may also store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the system configuration.
- the system configuration may include, for example, silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screenshots. Exemplarily, please refer to Table 2, which is an example of the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the system configuration.
- the above-mentioned system configuration may also be referred to as the capability of an electronic device.
- the first system configuration may be referred to as the first capability.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle.
- the electronic device may acquire the angle interval in which the first angle is located, which is the first angle interval.
- the first system configuration is applied to the electronic device, that is, the electronic device starts the first system configuration.
- the first angle is 120°
- the first angle interval is 90°-135°
- the first system is configured in the power saving mode
- the first time threshold is 0.4 seconds.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at 120° for a time greater than or equal to 0.4 seconds, and the angular interval of 120° can be obtained, which is 90°-135°.
- the electronic device adjusts the system configuration to the power saving mode according to the mapping relationship between 90° ⁇ 135° and the power saving mode. If the current electronic device is already in the power saving mode, the electronic device still keeps the system configured in the power saving mode.
- the foregoing process of adjusting to the power saving mode can realize that the electronic device adjusts the power saving mode in advance according to the first angle and the mapping relationship before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form.
- manual operation by the user is not required to adjust the power saving mode, which improves the convenience.
- the embodiment of the present application takes the adjustment of the electronic device to the power saving mode during the unfolding process of the flexible display screen as an example for introduction, and the silent mode, the eye protection mode and the automatic screen capture process are similar.
- the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power.
- the electronic device may also perform other operations to save power, such as stopping the automatic background refresh of the application, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device will not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It does not ring when the notification message of the application is received.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the silent mode. For example, when the silent mode is adjusted, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
- the electronic device After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
- the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
- the electronic device after the electronic device applies the first system configuration to the electronic device according to the mapping relationship between the first angle interval and the first system configuration, it may display a prompt to prompt that it has switched to the first system configuration. .
- the electronic device when the flexible display screen is in a folded form, the electronic device may partially display the main screen interface 10.
- the electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 2.
- the electronic device can obtain the opening angle.
- the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at 120° for a time greater than or equal to 0.4 seconds, and the angular interval of 120° can be obtained, which is 90°-135°.
- the electronic device is adjusted to the power saving mode.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG.
- the electronic device when the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the first angle is 180°, the electronic device can display the main screen interface 50 in full screen.
- the layout of the application icons on the home screen interface 50 and the home screen interface 10 may be different.
- the electronic device also displays a system configuration prompt interface 60.
- the system configuration prompt interface 60 may include a power saving mode icon 601, a close control 602, and a hidden control 603. among them:
- the power saving mode icon 601 is used to indicate that the power saving mode has been switched to.
- the user can touch the power-saving mode icon 601, so that the electronic device displays the system setting interface in response to the above-mentioned touch operation on the power-saving mode icon 601.
- the close control 602 is used to close the power saving mode.
- the user can touch the close control 602, so that the electronic device, in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the close control 602, closes the power saving mode, and returns to the system configuration when the flexible display screen is in a folded form.
- the hidden control 603 is used to hide the prompt interface 60.
- the user can touch the hidden control 603, so that the electronic device hides the system configuration prompt interface 60 in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the hidden control 603. After the system configuration prompt interface 60 is hidden, the electronic device is still in the power saving mode.
- the electronic device Before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form, the electronic device is adjusted to a power saving mode in advance. There is no need for the user to manually find the corresponding icon and adjust the icon to the power saving mode, which improves the convenience.
- FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an interface of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the power-saving mode icon 601, the close control 602 and the hidden control 603 can also be displayed through the pull-down menu 70 or the pull-up menu 80. It is not limited to this, and can also be displayed by side dragging.
- the menu or floating menu is displayed, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any restriction on this.
- the second prompt information may include the power saving mode icon 601 shown in FIG. 5, the power saving mode icon 601 shown in (B) in FIG. 6, and the power saving mode icon 601 shown in (A) in FIG. Power saving mode icon 601 out.
- Figs. 7 and 8 are respectively schematic diagrams of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) in FIG. 7, it is a system setting interface 90.
- the system setting interface 90 includes a plurality of system function setting portals, and the plurality of system function setting portals may include an intelligent auxiliary setting portal 901.
- the intelligent auxiliary setting interface 1000 may include multiple function setting entries.
- the multiple function setting entries may include, for example, smart screen recognition 1001, voice control 1002, folding screen angle control 1003, gesture control 1004, and timing shutdown 1005.
- the folding screen angle control interface 1100 may include a folding screen angle control switch 1101 and multiple angle interval setting entries.
- the multiple angle interval setting entrances may include, for example, a 0-45° setting entrance 1102, a 45-90° setting entrance 1103, a 90-135° setting entrance 1104, and a 135-179° setting entrance 1105.
- the angle interval setting entry can be used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- the folding screen angle control switch 1101 can display a closed state.
- the electronic device In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the folding screen angle control switch 1101, the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control switch 1101 as Open state.
- a user operation such as a touch operation
- the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control switch 1101 as Open state.
- the multiple angle interval setting entrances cannot respond to the user's operation, but can respond to the user's operation in the open state.
- the 0-45° setting entrance 1102 may also include a prompt 1102a for prompting "not set”.
- the 45-90° setting entrance 1103 may also include a prompt 1103a for prompting "not set”.
- the 90-135° setting entrance 1104 may also include a prompt 1104a for prompting "not set”.
- the 135-179° setting entrance 1105 may also include a prompt 1105a for prompting "not set”.
- the electronic device in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the 0-45° setting entry 1102, the electronic device displays a 0-45° setting interface 1200.
- 0-45° setting The interface 1200 may include an application setting control 1201, a system configuration control 1202, an icon display area 1203, and a return control 1204.
- the application setting control 1201 and the system configuration control 1202 respectively correspond to a content display area.
- the icon display area 1203 is an icon display area corresponding to the application setting control 1201.
- the electronic device displays the content display area corresponding to the system configuration control 1202. For details, refer to the description of (B) in FIG. 8.
- the return control 1204 is used to return to the previous interface of the 0-45° setting interface 1200.
- the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control interface 1100.
- the icon display area 1203 may include a Weibo icon 1203a, a Twitter icon 1203b, a gallery icon 1203c, A game icon 1203d, B game icon 1203e, WeChat icon 1203f, Facebook 1203g, QQ icon 1203h, and empty icon 1203i. It is not limited to these application icons.
- the electronic device can display more application icons.
- the user can operate any icon in the icon display area 1203, such as a touch operation, to set the application corresponding to the 0-45°.
- a touch operation to set the application corresponding to the 0-45°.
- the application icon in the icon display area 1203 is displayed in an unselected state.
- the electronic device displays the microblog The icon 1203a is selected.
- the electronic device in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the return control 1204, the electronic device displays a folding screen angle control interface 1100.
- the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 may no longer display the prompt 1102a, but display the prompt 1102b, which is used to prompt "Weibo".
- the electronic device can display the empty icon 1203i in a selected state, indicating that the electronic device sets the 0-45° interval to not correspond to any application. That is, when the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded form and the pause time at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, and the first angle falls within 0-45°, the electronic device does not open any application or open any application. Any system configuration.
- the electronic device displays the icon display area corresponding to the system configuration control 1202, That is, the icon display area 1204.
- the icon display area 1204 may include a silent mode icon 1204a, an eye protection mode icon 1204b, a power saving mode icon 1204c, an automatic screenshot icon 1204d, and an empty icon 1204e.
- (C) and (D) in Figure 7 and (A) in Figure 8 take the application setting process corresponding to 0-45° as an example to introduce, 45-90°, 90-135° and 135° -179° is similar.
- the 0-45° interval setting entry 1102 may no longer display the prompt 1102a, but display the prompt 1102b for prompting "Weibo".
- the 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 may no longer display the prompt 1103a, but display the prompt 1103b, which is used to prompt "A game”.
- the 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 may no longer display the prompt 1104a, but display the prompt 1104b, which is used to prompt the "Gallery”.
- the 135-179° interval setting entrance 1105 can no longer display the prompt 1105a, but display the prompt 1105b, which is used to prompt "Youtu”.
- the electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 1 according to the above settings.
- the system configuration corresponding to 0-45°, 45-90°, 90-135° and 135-179° can also be compared to the application setting process corresponding to 0-45°.
- the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 can display a prompt 1102c for prompting "silent mode”.
- the 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 can display prompt 1103c, which is used to prompt "eye protection mode”.
- the 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 can display prompt 1104c, which is used to prompt "power saving mode”.
- the 135-179° interval setting entrance 1105 can display the prompt 1105c, which is used to prompt "automatic screenshot”.
- the electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 2 according to the above settings.
- the electronic device may display the empty icon 1204e in a selected state, indicating that the electronic device sets the 0-45° interval to not correspond to any system configuration. That is, when the electronic device detects that the time when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form at a first angle and pauses is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, and the first angle falls within 0-45°, the electronic device does not turn on any system configuration.
- mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application is not limited to be set in the folded form of the flexible display screen, and may also be set in the full-screen display.
- the above description takes four angle intervals as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to four, and other number of angle intervals may also be used, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device may count the startup frequency or number of times of the application in a full-screen display scenario. Then, the electronic device obtains the most frequently used or frequently used applications, and starts these applications when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form to the unfolded form.
- the electronic device counts the number of times the application is launched during full-screen display within a period of time. For example, the electronic device obtains the four applications that have been launched the most frequently in full screen display, and the number of launches of each application. As shown in Table 3, Table 3 is an example of counting the number of application launches in full-screen display.
- the statistics of electronic devices show that the four applications with the largest number of launches in full-screen display, and the number of launches of each application: 102 times on Weibo, 89 times for A games, 80 times for gallery, and 78 times for B games.
- the electronic device can store the logos of these four applications: Weibo, A game, gallery, and B game.
- Weibo weibo
- a game A game
- gallery a game
- B game a game that the flexible display screen is expanded from a folded form to an opening angle of a set angle (for example, 20°)
- the electronic device may run applications corresponding to the four application identifiers in the background.
- a prompt may be displayed to prompt that the four applications have been running in the background.
- the prompt can be compared to the prompt interface 40 in the example described in FIG. 3, the system configuration prompt interface 60 in the example described in FIG. 5, and the drop-down menu 70 or the pull-up menu 80 in the example described in FIG. 6, and will not be repeated here.
- the foregoing example of obtaining the number of activations corresponding to the application is only used to explain the embodiments of the present application, and should not constitute a limitation.
- the electronic device may also obtain applications with more or fewer activations, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- it is not limited to the statistics of the startup frequency and the number of startups, but also the statistics of other parameters, such as the statistics of the foreground running time of the application when the full-screen display is displayed, and then the background startup application is determined according to the statistical result.
- the applications running in the background which is more in line with the user's personal usage habits, thereby increasing the probability of the applications running in the background being used by the user in the full-screen display, and reducing the user's manual start of the application. Time-consuming, which can provide convenience for users.
- the electronic device can display the application icons in the icon display area 1203 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 according to the above-mentioned statistics of the number of application startups in the full-screen display state.
- the applications with more application launches are displayed in the front of the icon display area 1203.
- the angle interval in the angle interval setting entry may be set in response to a user operation.
- FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the folding screen angle control interface 1100 may further include an add angle control 1106, a delete angle control 1107, and a switch 1108.
- each angle section setting entry may also include an angle adjustment bar for the user to adjust the angle section.
- the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 includes an angle adjustment bar 1102d
- the 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 includes an angle adjustment bar 1103d
- the 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 includes an angle adjustment bar 1104d
- the 135-179° interval includes an angle adjustment bar 1105d.
- the angle adjustment bar 1102d may include an adjustment point 1102d-1 and an adjustment point 1102d-2.
- the electronic device in response to the user's drag operation on the adjustment point 1102d-1, can adjust the lower limit 0° of the 0-45° angular interval.
- the electronic device in response to the user's drag operation on the adjustment point 1102d-1, the electronic device adjusts the lower limit 0° of the 0-45° angle interval to 15°, and changes the display of the “0-45° interval” to “15- 45° interval”.
- the adjustment point 1102d-2 can also respond to a user's operation, so that the electronic device adjusts the upper limit of the angle interval corresponding to 45°.
- the angle adjustment bar 1103d, the angle adjustment bar 1104d, and the angle adjustment bar 1105d can be similar to the description of the above angle adjustment bar 1102d.
- multiple angle intervals can be set by the electronic device and cannot be overlapped.
- the other angle intervals can be adjusted in the range of 45-180°.
- the embodiment of the present application takes the angle adjustment bar as an example for description, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific design of the control for adjusting the angle interval, and other designs are also possible.
- An angle control 1106 is added for adding one or more angle intervals.
- the electronic device may display a user interface for increasing the angle interval.
- the delete angle control 1107 is used to delete the added angle interval.
- the added angle interval can include 0-45°, 45-90°, 90-135°, and 135-179°.
- the first switch may include a switch 1101, and the second switch may include a switch 1108.
- the folding screen angle control interface 1100 may include a first switch and a second switch, may also include only the first switch, or may only include the second switch, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device may, in response to a user's operation, close the above-mentioned foreground startup application and close the background startup application function.
- the switch 1108 can be used to turn off the function of starting applications in the foreground and turning off the functions of starting applications in the background. Specifically, as shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 9, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state, the switch 1108 is in the disabled state.
- the electronic device can display the folding screen angle control switch 1101 as a closed state, and close the foreground function of starting applications and adjusting system configuration. As shown in FIG.
- the electronic device in response to a user operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the angle control switch 1101 of the folding screen, the electronic device may no longer display the setting entry of each angle interval, and the angle control interface 1100 of the folding screen may also Contains prompt 1109 to prompt "After closing, stop at a certain angle and do nothing.”
- the switch 1108 changes from the disabled state to the effective state.
- the electronic device can turn the switch 1108 on or off in response to the user's touch operation on the switch 1108.
- the switch 1108 is closed, the opening angle of the flexible display screen stops at a certain angle, and the electronic device does not perform any operation.
- the switch 1108 is turned on, the opening angle of the flexible display screen is stopped at a certain angle, which can trigger the electronic device to run in the background of the full-screen display application that has been launched the most times.
- the electronic device when it is detected that the flexible display screen is expanded from a folded form to an opening angle of a set angle (for example, 20°), the electronic device can detect the folding screen angle control switch 1101 in the folding screen angle control interface 1100 Whether it is in the open state.
- the folding screen angle control switch 1101 when the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may set the corresponding application or The system configuration starts the application or adjusts the system configuration.
- the folding screen angle control switch 1101 when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the electronic device can run the statistical application in the background when detecting that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the set angle.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application of a folding screen device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the application opening method may include steps S101 to S106.
- the flexible display screen of the electronic device is in a folded form.
- the electronic device detects whether the folding screen angle control switch 1101 in the folding screen angle control interface 1100 is in the open state.
- the setting angle may be 20°.
- the electronic device can detect whether the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state.
- the electronic device when it is detected that the first angle falls at the boundary point of the two angle intervals, the electronic device may reduce the first angle by 1°, and detect the corresponding angle interval in which the reduced angle falls Application or system configuration.
- 135° is the boundary point between 90° to 135° and 135° to 179°.
- the electronic device may reduce 135° by 1°, and obtain the application or system configuration corresponding to the angular interval of 90°-135° in which 134° falls.
- the electronic device can run the statistical application in the background when detecting that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the set angle.
- the electronic device when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the off state, the electronic device can determine which applications are running in the background according to the running memory occupancy and the statistics of the number of times the application is started when the application is displayed in full screen. The more the running memory is occupied, the fewer apps are running in the background. After determining the number S (integer) of applications running in the background, the electronic device can select the S applications that have been launched the most times during full-screen display according to Table 3.
- the folding screen angle control switch 1101 when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 20°, it detects that 80% of the running memory is left, and the electronic device can run in the background with the largest number of startups when the full screen is displayed. 4 applications. That is, the electronic device starts Weibo, A game, gallery and B game in the background according to Table 3. When the electronic device detects that 50% of the running memory remains, the electronic device can run the 3 applications that have been launched the most in full-screen display in the background. That is, the electronic device starts Weibo, A game and gallery in the background according to Table 3.
- the flexible display screen of the electronic device is in an expanded form.
- the electronic device counts the applications started in the expanded state, and updates the statistics table of the number of times the applications are started according to the statistical results.
- the electronic device may update the number of activations in the application activation count table when a certain application is activated.
- the application may be started in response to a touch operation acting on the application icon, or it may be started through the examples described in FIGS. 2 and 3 before the flexible display screen is expanded to the expanded form.
- the statistics of the number of application launches obtained by the electronic device are shown in Table 3.
- the number of launches that the electronic device can update the gallery is 81 times.
- the electronic device can give a prompt when the flexible display screen is unfolded to a certain angle.
- the electronic device may generate a vibration prompt to remind the user of the current opening angle.
- a mechanical component may be provided at the position of the bending part of the electronic device. When the opening angle of the flexible display screen reaches 45°, 90°, and 135° during the unfolding process from the folded state, the mechanical component can cause the electronic device to generate a vibration prompt to remind the user of the current opening angle.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2.
- Mobile communication module 150 wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
- SIM Subscriber identification module
- the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
- the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
- the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
- the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
- the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait.
- AP application processor
- modem processor modem processor
- GPU graphics processing unit
- image signal processor image signal processor
- ISP image signal processor
- controller memory
- video codec digital signal processor
- DSP digital signal processor
- NPU neural-network processing unit
- the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
- the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100.
- the controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
- a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data.
- the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
- the memory can store instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or used cyclically. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
- the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
- Interfaces can include integrated circuit (I2C) interfaces, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interfaces, pulse code modulation (PCM) interfaces, universal asynchronous transmitters receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
- I2C integrated circuit
- I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
- PCM pulse code modulation
- UART mobile industry processor interface
- MIPI mobile industry processor interface
- GPIO general-purpose input/output
- SIM subscriber identity module
- USB Universal Serial Bus
- the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, which includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
- the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
- the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193, etc., respectively through different I2C bus interfaces.
- the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through an I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100.
- the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
- the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
- the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
- the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
- the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
- the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
- the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
- the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
- the bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
- the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
- the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function.
- the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
- the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices.
- the MIPI interface includes a camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), a display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), and so on.
- the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100.
- the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through a DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100.
- the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
- the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
- the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on.
- the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
- the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on.
- the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect earphones and play audio through earphones. This interface can also be used to connect to other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
- the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
- the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
- the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
- the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130.
- the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
- the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
- the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charge management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the external memory, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
- the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
- the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110.
- the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
- the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
- the antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
- Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
- Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
- the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
- the mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100.
- the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
- the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering, amplifying and transmitting the received electromagnetic waves to the modem processor for demodulation.
- the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 1.
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
- the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
- the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
- the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor.
- the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194.
- the modem processor may be an independent device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
- the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites.
- WLAN wireless local area networks
- BT wireless fidelity
- GNSS global navigation satellite system
- FM frequency modulation
- NFC near field communication technology
- infrared technology infrared, IR
- the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
- the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110.
- the wireless communication module 160 may also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves to radiate through the antenna 2.
- the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
- the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
- the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
- GPS global positioning system
- GLONASS global navigation satellite system
- BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
- QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
- SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
- the electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
- the GPU is an image processing microprocessor, which is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
- the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
- the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
- the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
- the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
- the display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode).
- LCD liquid crystal display
- OLED organic light-emitting diode
- active-matrix organic light-emitting diode active-matrix organic light-emitting diode
- AMOLED flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc.
- the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
- the display panel can be implemented by OLED, AMOLED, or FLED, so that the display screen 194 can be bent.
- the display screen that can be bent is referred to as a foldable display screen.
- the foldable display screen may be one screen, or a display screen formed by patching together multiple screens, which is not limited here.
- the electronic device 100 can realize a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
- the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye.
- ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
- the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
- the camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos.
- the object generates an optical image through the lens and is projected to the photosensitive element.
- the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
- CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
- the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transfers the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
- ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
- DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals.
- the electronic device 100 may include one or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
- Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
- Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
- the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
- MPEG moving picture experts group
- MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
- NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
- NN neural-network
- applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
- the external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
- the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
- the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions.
- the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
- the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
- the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function.
- the data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100.
- the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
- UFS universal flash storage
- the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
- the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal.
- the audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
- the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
- the speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
- the receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the electronic device 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
- the microphone 170C also called “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
- the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through the human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C.
- the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
- the earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
- the earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, and a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
- OMTP open mobile terminal platform
- CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA
- the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
- the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194.
- the capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
- the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
- the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
- the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
- touch operations that act on the same touch position but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
- the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100.
- the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
- the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
- the gyro sensor 180B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
- the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
- the electronic device 100 may also detect the bending angle of the foldable display screen, that is, the opening angle, through the acceleration sensor 180E and the gyroscope sensor 180B.
- the electronic device 100 can also determine whether the foldable display screen is in the folded form or the unfolded form according to the angle of the bend.
- the electronic device 100 can also detect the time that the flexible display screen is held at the first angle according to the bent angle.
- the part where the A screen of the flexible display screen is located may include a group of sensors: at least one acceleration sensor 180E and at least one gyroscope sensor 180B.
- the part where the screen B is located may also include a group of sensors: at least one acceleration sensor 180E and at least one gyroscope sensor 180B.
- the electronic device can extract the acceleration sensor value (unit is m/s2, sampling frequency is 100Hz) and the system time corresponding to the data from the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor through the filtering algorithm, and use these parameters to calculate by further fusion algorithm to obtain the folding The relative angle of the two screens.
- the electronic device 100 may further include an angle sensor (not shown in FIG. 11), and the angle sensor may be arranged at a bending position of the foldable display screen.
- the electronic device 100 can measure the angle formed by the two ends of the middle bending part of the foldable display screen through an angle sensor disposed at the bending part of the foldable display screen.
- the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
- the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
- the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
- the electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
- the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
- features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
- the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and apply to applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on.
- the electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
- the proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode.
- the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
- the electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode.
- the electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
- the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
- the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light.
- the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
- the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
- the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
- the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
- the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, and so on.
- the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
- the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
- the electronic device 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature.
- the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
- Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
- the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”.
- the touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it.
- the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
- the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194.
- the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
- the audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function.
- the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
- the button 190 includes a power-on button, a volume button, and so on.
- the button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button.
- the electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
- the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
- the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
- touch operations that act on different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- Different application scenarios for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
- the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
- the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
- the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card.
- the SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
- the same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different.
- the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
- the SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards.
- the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication.
- the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
- the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
- the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
- the embodiment of the present application takes an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 by way of example.
- FIG. 12 shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application.
- the electronic device 100 can start an application or adjust the system configuration according to the stopped first angle during the process of the flexible display screen being unfolded from the folded form to the unfolded form.
- the software system of the electronic device may include: an application layer, an application programming interface (application programming interface, API), a system library, and a kernel layer (kernel). among them:
- the kernel layer is the layer between the hardware layer and the software layer.
- the hardware layer may include at least the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor of the A screen part, and the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor of the B screen part, which are used to obtain the sensor data of the two parts respectively.
- the kernel layer may include sensor drivers.
- the acceleration sensor 180E and the gyroscope sensor 180E detect sensor data, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
- the kernel layer sends sensor data to the sensor manager in the system library.
- the kernel layer can also include display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and so on.
- the system library can include multiple functional modules. For example, it includes a sensor manager, which is used to obtain the three-axis data of the part where the A screen is located and the three-axis data of the part where the B screen is located, and calculate the opening angle of the flexible display screen.
- the sensor manager may include a three-axis data acquisition unit for the A screen part, a three-axis data acquisition unit for the B screen part and an angle calculation unit. among them:
- the three-axis data acquisition unit of the A screen part can be used to obtain the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor of the part where the A screen is located (the unit is m/s2, the sampling frequency is 100Hz) and the three-axis data of the gyro sensor after zero offset correction.
- the three-axis data acquisition unit of the B screen part can be used to obtain the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor and the three-axis data of the gyro sensor after the zero offset correction from the sensor driver.
- the angle calculation unit can calculate the opening angle of the flexible display according to the three-axis data of the part where the A screen is located and the three-axis data of the part where the B screen is located, and transmit the opening angle of the flexible display to the application framework layer.
- the angle calculation unit can extract the acceleration sensor value and the system time corresponding to the data from the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor through a filtering algorithm, and use these parameters to calculate through further fusion algorithms to obtain two screens A and B in the flexible display screen.
- the relative angle of the screen that is, the opening angle.
- the angle calculation unit may periodically calculate the opening angle and report the opening angle.
- the system library may also include a surface manager, a media library, a three-dimensional graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), a 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL), and so on.
- a surface manager for example: OpenGL ES
- a media library for example: a three-dimensional graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES)
- a three-dimensional graphics processing library for example: OpenGL ES
- a 2D graphics engine for example: SGL
- the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
- the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
- the application framework layer may include angle detection start application service, activity management service (activity manager service, AMS), and system configuration adjustment service.
- Angle detection starts the application service, which can include angle interval detection unit, application or system configuration matching unit and trigger unit.
- the angle interval detection unit may receive angle data from the angle calculation unit, and the angle data is, for example, 0-180°.
- the angle interval detection unit determines that the flexible display screen is gradually unfolded from the folded form.
- the angle calculation unit may determine that the flexible display screen expands from the folded configuration to a stop at the first angle.
- the angle interval detection unit can also detect the angle interval at which the flexible display screen stops at the first angle during the unfolding process of the folded configuration.
- the angle interval may be one of the angle intervals shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
- the application and system configuration matching unit can determine the application to be started or the system configuration to be adjusted according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application, and notify the trigger unit.
- the mapping relationship may be the mapping relationship shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
- the application and system configuration matching unit may determine the application corresponding to the angle interval according to the stored mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application. Refer to the example described in Table 1 for the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- the application and system configuration matching unit may determine the first angle according to the stored mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration. Angle interval, and determine the corresponding system configuration. Refer to the example described in Table 2 for the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration.
- the angle interval detection unit may determine the application to be started or the system configuration to be adjusted according to Table 1 and Table 2.
- the angle interval detection unit can detect that the opening angle is a set angle (for example, 20°), and run one or more statistics obtained in the background.
- Applications For the one or more applications obtained by statistics, please refer to the examples shown in Table 3.
- the trigger unit can instruct the AMS to start the first application according to the notification from the application and system configuration matching unit, and can also instruct the system configuration adjustment service to adjust the system configuration according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration.
- the first application reference may be made to the gallery application shown in FIG. 2.
- the system configuration adjustment service to adjust the system configuration according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration.
- the angle interval detection unit in the process of detecting that the flexible display screen is gradually unfolding from the folded form, the angle interval detection unit successively detects two different pause angles, and may send the two different pause angles to the application and system configuration. unit.
- the application and system configuration unit can match two different applications according to these two different pause angles, and notify AMS one after another.
- AMS starts these two applications and sets the subsequent pause angles to the corresponding
- the application runs in the foreground, and runs in the background of the application corresponding to the previous pause angle.
- the AMS runs the two applications in the foreground, for example, instructs to display the application interfaces of the two applications on a split screen.
- the AMS can start the corresponding application in the application layer according to the instruction from the trigger unit.
- the system configuration adjustment service can adjust the system configuration in the application layer according to the instruction from the trigger unit, for example, adjust to the power saving mode.
- the application framework layer can also include window managers, content providers, view systems, phone managers, resource managers, notification managers, etc.
- the application layer can include a series of application packages. As shown in Figure 12, the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, etc. These application packages can be launched by AMS.
- the applications running in the foreground are presented to the user in the form of an interface, and the embodiments described in FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 may be referred to.
- the application running in the background may be presented to the user in the form of a prompt interface, and the embodiment described in FIG. 3 may be referred to.
- the application layer can also present the adjusted system configuration, such as power saving mode, adjusting the brightness of the display screen and so on.
- the adjusted system configuration may also be presented to the user in the form of a prompt interface, and the embodiments described in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 may be referred to.
- the functional architecture of the electronic device shown in FIG. 12 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the electronic device may also include more or fewer software modules, which is not limited here.
- the electronic device may further include a display module, and the display module is configured to display a corresponding user interface according to the operation of each software module.
- the display module For the user interface displayed by the display module, refer to the embodiments shown in Figs. 2-9.
- the display module can be specifically implemented as the display screen 194 in FIG. 11.
- FIG. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application according to an opening angle of a flexible display screen provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application according to an opening angle of a flexible display screen provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- For the application interface involved in the method of opening an application refer to Figs. 2-6.
- steps S201 to S212 in FIG. 13 reference may be made to the related description in FIG. 12, which will not be repeated here.
- the term “when” can be interpreted as meaning “if" or “after” or “in response to determining" or “in response to detecting".
- the phrase “when determining" or “if detected (statement or event)” can be interpreted as meaning “if determined" or “in response to determining" or “when detected (Condition or event stated)” or “in response to detection of (condition or event stated)”.
- the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
- the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
- the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
- the usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
- the process can be completed by a computer program instructing relevant hardware.
- the program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. , May include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
- the aforementioned storage media include: ROM or random storage RAM, magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
Abstract
An application activation method for an apparatus having a foldable screen, and a related device. In the method, when a flexible display screen in a folded state is unfolded to a first angle, and a duration of a pause at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold, an electronic apparatus can activate a first application or activate a first capability. Implementing the technical solution of the present invention can enhance the convenience of application activation, thereby improving user experience of using an apparatus having a foldable screen.
Description
本申请要求于2019年08月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910819802.8、申请名称为“折叠屏设备中应用打开方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on August 31, 2019, the application number is 201910819802.8, and the application name is "Opening method and related devices in folding screen equipment", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference In this application.
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及折叠屏设备中应用打开方法及相关装置。This application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular to a method for opening an application in a folding screen device and related devices.
柔性显示屏相对于传统屏幕而言,具有柔韧性强和可折叠的特点。对于折叠屏设备来说,由于配置有柔性显示屏,柔性显示屏可在折叠形态和展开形态之间切换,以实现折叠屏设备在局部显示和全屏显示之间切换。Compared with traditional screens, flexible display screens are more flexible and foldable. For the folding screen device, because it is equipped with a flexible display screen, the flexible display screen can be switched between a folded form and an unfolded form, so that the folding screen device can switch between partial display and full-screen display.
用户将柔性显示屏展开来实现全屏显示后,折叠屏设备可响应于用户操作在柔性显示屏上启动应用。然而,一些应用往往需要花费较长的时间来启动。例如游戏类应用、视频播放类应用往往启动速度很慢,影响用户体验。另外,在折叠屏设备的柔性显示屏由折叠形态切换为展开形态时,柔性显示屏上显示的应用图标的位置可能会发生变化。这样,不利于用户找到应用图标并打开应用,降低了操作便利性。After the user unfolds the flexible display screen to achieve full-screen display, the folding screen device can launch an application on the flexible display screen in response to the user's operation. However, some applications often take a long time to start. For example, game applications and video playback applications often start slowly, which affects user experience. In addition, when the flexible display screen of the folding screen device is switched from the folded form to the unfolded form, the position of the application icon displayed on the flexible display screen may change. In this way, it is not conducive for the user to find the application icon and open the application, which reduces the convenience of operation.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种折叠屏设备中应用打开方法及相关装置,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动应用。这样,减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间,提高了应用启动的便利性。The embodiment of the present application provides a method and related device for opening an application in a folding screen device, which can realize that the application is started in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. In this way, the time taken by the application startup after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form is reduced, and the convenience of application startup is improved.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用打开方法,该方法应用于包含有柔性显示屏的电子设备,该方法包括:该电子设备的该柔性显示屏处于折叠形态;该电子设备检测到该柔性显示屏由该折叠形态展开第一角度;并且该柔性显示屏在该第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值;该电子设备启动第一应用或者,该电子设备开启第一能力。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an application opening method, which is applied to an electronic device including a flexible display screen, and the method includes: the flexible display screen of the electronic device is in a folded configuration; the electronic device detects The flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time during which the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold; the electronic device starts the first application or the electronic device starts the first capability .
实施第一方面提供的方法,电子设备检测到柔性显示屏停顿在第一角度超过第一时间阈值,就启动第一应用或者开启第一能力。这样,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动应用或者预先开启能力。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用或能力启动所占用的时间,提升用户使用折叠屏设备的体验。另外,无需用户手动操作来启动应用或能力,提高了应用和能力启动的便利性。Implementing the method provided in the first aspect, the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is stopped at a first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the first application or starts the first capability. In this way, it is possible to pre-launch the application or pre-launch the capability before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken by the application or ability to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device. In addition, there is no need for the user to manually operate to start the application or the ability, which improves the convenience of starting the application and the ability.
例如,电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在120°超过0.5秒,则电子设备启动B游戏应用。电子设备利用展开过程的时间即可以在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之后完成启动B游戏应用,减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后B游戏应用启动所占用的时间,提升用户使用折叠屏设备的体验。另外,无需用户手动点击B游戏应用的图标来启动,提高了应用的便利性。For example, if the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at 120° for more than 0.5 seconds, the electronic device starts the B game application. The electronic device can use the time of the unfolding process to complete the start of the B game application after the flexible display is unfolded to the unfolded form, which reduces the time taken for the B game application to start after the flexible display is in the unfolded form, and promotes the use of folding screen devices Experience. In addition, there is no need for the user to manually click the icon of the B game application to start it, which improves the convenience of the application.
其中,电子设备可通过加速度传感器和陀螺仪传感器检测数据,来计算柔性显示屏的打开角度。电子设备还可以根据该打开角度确定柔性显示屏处于折叠形态。例如,当柔性 显示屏的打开角度为0°~3°,确定柔性显示屏为折叠形态。Among them, the electronic device can calculate the opening angle of the flexible display screen through the detection data of the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor. The electronic device can also determine that the flexible display screen is in a folded form according to the opening angle. For example, when the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 0°~3°, it is determined that the flexible display screen is in a folded form.
本申请实施例中,第一时间阈值可以是电子设备多次采集用户在柔性显示屏的一个打开角度保持的时间,然后根据采集到的这多个时间确定的。In the embodiment of the present application, the first time threshold may be determined by the electronic device for multiple times when the user is held at an opening angle of the flexible display screen, and then determined according to the collected times.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备启动第一应用,包括:所述电子设备启动第一应用,并将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device activating the first application includes: the electronic device activating the first application, and displaying the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen Or partial display.
全屏显示时,用户界面可以是占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。另一种可能的实现方式中,全屏显示时,用户界面占满柔性显示屏的显示区域,可包含导航栏和状态栏。局部显示时,用户界面可以未占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。In full-screen display, the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar. In another possible implementation manner, when the full screen is displayed, the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar. In partial display, the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如果第一应用已在展开到第一角度之前被后台运行,则电子设备无需启动第一应用,在柔性显示屏上显示第一应用的用户界面。In some embodiments of the present application, if the first application has been run in the background before being expanded to the first angle, the electronic device does not need to start the first application, and displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备启动第一应用之后所述方法还包括:当检测到所述柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,所述电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the electronic device starts the first application, the method further includes: when detecting that the flexible display screen is in an unfolded configuration, the electronic device The user interface is displayed in full screen or partially on the flexible display screen.
电子设备检测到柔性显示屏停顿在第一角度超过第一时间阈值,就启动第一应用并显示第一应用的用户界面,这样,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动应用并显示应用的用户界面。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动和显示所占用的时间,提升用户使用折叠屏设备的体验。When the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, it starts the first application and displays the user interface of the first application. In this way, it is possible to pre-start the application and display before the flexible display is opened to the unfolded form. Display the user interface of the application. This reduces the time taken for application startup and display after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备启动第一应用之后,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备检测所述柔性显示屏展开第二角度,并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第二角度停顿的时间大于或等于第二时间阈值;其中,所述第二角度大于所述第一角度,所述第二时间阈值与所述第一时间阈值相同或不同;所述电子设备启动第二应用,所述第二应用不同于所述第一应用,或者启动第二能力,所述第二能力不同于所述第一能力。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the electronic device starts the first application, the method further includes: the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded by a second angle, and the flexible display screen is at the The second angle pause time is greater than or equal to a second time threshold; wherein, the second angle is greater than the first angle, and the second time threshold is the same as or different from the first time threshold; the electronic device Start a second application, the second application is different from the first application, or start a second capability, the second capability is different from the first capability.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备启动第二应用之后,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行;或者所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the electronic device starts the second application, the method further includes: the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen, And running the first application in the background; or the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动第一应用和第二应用。这样,可减小柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间。另外,无需用户手动找到并触摸第一应用和第二应用的图标,提高了应用启动的便利性。Before the flexible display screen is opened to the expanded state, the first application and the second application are started in advance. In this way, the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form can be reduced. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the icons of the first application and the second application, which improves the convenience of application startup.
第一应用后台运行后,第一应用已经被启动且未被电子设备关闭。响应于用户打开第一应用的操作(例如对图库图标的触摸操作),电子设备可无需重新启动第一应用,利用后台运行的第一应用显示第一应用的用户界面。After the first application runs in the background, the first application has been started and has not been closed by the electronic device. In response to the user's operation of opening the first application (for example, a touch operation on a gallery icon), the electronic device may use the first application running in the background to display the user interface of the first application without restarting the first application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备在检测到运行内存剩余量小于设定阈值时,可将后台运行的第一应用关闭。In a possible implementation manner, when the electronic device detects that the remaining amount of running memory is less than the set threshold, the first application running in the background may be closed.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行之后,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示所述第一应用已后台运行。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen and runs the first application in the background, the method further includes : The electronic device displays first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the first application is running in the background.
其中,电子设备还可以显示关闭控件,用于将后台运行的第一应用关闭。电子设备还可以显示隐藏控件,用于将关闭控件和/或第一提示信息隐藏。Wherein, the electronic device may also display a close control for closing the first application running in the background. The electronic device may also display a hidden control for hiding the closing control and/or the first prompt information.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏,可包括以下两种方案:With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen, which may include the following two solutions:
(1)电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上分屏显示。分屏显示状态下,用户可对第一应用的用户界面和第二应用用户界面进行操作,电子设备可进行响应。例如,第一应用是图库应用,响应于作用在图库应用的用户界面上缩略图的触摸操作,电子设备可显示该缩略图对应的图片。(1) The electronic device displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen in separate screens. In the split-screen display state, the user can operate the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application, and the electronic device can respond. For example, the first application is a gallery application, and in response to a touch operation acting on a thumbnail on a user interface of the gallery application, the electronic device may display a picture corresponding to the thumbnail.
(2)电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上层叠显示。响应于检测到的作用在其中一个用户界面的用户操作,例如作用在第一应用的用户界面的用户操作,电子设备可全屏显示第一应用的用户界面。(2) The electronic device overlays and displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen. In response to the detected user operation acting on one of the user interfaces, for example, the user operation acting on the user interface of the first application, the electronic device may display the user interface of the first application in full screen.
在一种可能的实现方式中,柔性显示屏在折叠形态下可处于解锁状态。In a possible implementation, the flexible display screen may be in an unlocked state in the folded configuration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备的柔性显示屏在折叠形态下还可处于锁屏状态。当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏在第一角度停顿时间大于或等于第一时间阈值时,电子设备可启动第一应用。当柔性显示屏展开为展开形态时,电子设备可响应于用户输入的指纹、人脸或者密码字符,对用户进行鉴权,鉴权成功则显示第一应用的用户界面。如果鉴权失败,则电子设备可关闭第一应用。其中,锁屏状态下,电子设备需要对用户鉴权(例如验证用户的指纹、人脸或者输入的密码字符)才能解锁,以显示主屏幕界面。In a possible implementation manner, the flexible display screen of the electronic device may also be in a locked screen state in the folded configuration. When the electronic device detects that the pause time of the flexible display at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may start the first application. When the flexible display screen is expanded into an expanded form, the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface of the first application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the first application. Among them, in the locked screen state, the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters) to be unlocked to display the main screen interface.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值之后,所述电子设备启动第一应用之前,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备确定所述第一角度对应的第一角度区间;所述电子设备根据角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,确定所述第一角度区间对应的所述第一应用。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded configuration at a first angle; and the time during which the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to After the first time threshold and before the electronic device starts the first application, the method further includes: the electronic device determines a first angle interval corresponding to the first angle; and the electronic device determines the interval between the angle interval and the application according to the angle interval. To determine the first application corresponding to the first angle interval.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电子设备可在柔性显示屏展开到一定角度时给出提示。例如,打开角度在第一角度区间时,电子设备可产生振动提示。打开角度落在下一个角度区间时,电子设备再次产生振动提示,以提醒用户当前的打开角度。In some embodiments of the present application, the electronic device can give a prompt when the flexible display screen is unfolded to a certain angle. For example, when the opening angle is in the first angle interval, the electronic device may generate a vibration prompt. When the opening angle falls within the next angle interval, the electronic device generates a vibration prompt again to remind the user of the current opening angle.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,该方法还包括:所述电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包含角度区间设置入口;进入所述角度区间设置入口后,根据用户操作,为每个角度区间设置对应的应用。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method further includes: the electronic device displays a first user interface, the first user interface includes an angle interval setting entrance; after entering the angle interval setting entrance, according to user operations , Set the corresponding application for each angle interval.
其中,角度区间可以是根据用户操作大小可调。Among them, the angle interval may be adjustable according to user operations.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述角度区间设置入口包含第一设置入口,所述第一设置入口用于修改或删除所述角度区间与所述应用的映射关系。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the angle interval setting entry includes a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
在一些实施例中,第一用户界面还可以包含用于添加角度区间设置入口的控件。In some embodiments, the first user interface may further include a control for adding an angle interval setting entry.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述第一用户界面还包括第一开关和/或第二开关;其中,所述第一开关,用于根据应用的启动频率自动开启启动频次最多的应用;或者所述第二开关,用于打开或关闭启动应用的功能。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first user interface further includes a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein, the first switch is used to automatically turn on the most frequently activated switch according to the activation frequency of the application. Application; or the second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
其中,该启动频次最多的应用可以是在全屏显示场景下,应用的启动频率或者次数的应用,也可以是不区分全屏或局部显示。该启动频次最多的应用可实时更新或周期更新。Among them, the application with the most startup frequency may be an application with the startup frequency or times of the application in a full-screen display scenario, or it may be an application that does not distinguish between full-screen or partial display. The most frequently launched application can be updated in real time or periodically.
本申请实施例中,电子设备可根据运行内存的占用情况确定自动开启启动频次最多的应用的数量。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device may determine the number of applications with the most frequent startup frequency to be automatically started according to the occupancy of running memory.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述第一能力包含以下中的任一个:静音模式、护眼模式、省电模式和自动截屏。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the first capability includes any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
被调整为省电模式之后,电子设备的处理器频率可降低、后台运行应用数量降低、显示屏亮度降低,一些系统功能会被关闭,来节省电量。After being adjusted to the power saving mode, the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power.
被调整为静音模式后,在接收到来电和信息时,电子设备可不进行响铃。在接收到应用的通知消息时也可不进行响铃。在被调整为静音模式下,电子设备的闹钟也可以不进行响铃。After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device may not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It is also possible not to ring when the notification message of the application is received. When adjusted to the silent mode, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
被调整为护眼模式后,电子设备可减少显示屏所显示的图像的蓝光成分,增加黄光的成分,以改变屏幕所显示图像的色调。After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
被配置自动截屏后,电子设备可对所显示的用户界面截取图像。After being configured to automatically take a screenshot, the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
结合第一方面,在一些实施例中,所述电子设备启动第一能力之后,所述方法还包括:所述电子设备显示第二提示信息,所述第二提示信息用于提示所述电子设备已开启所述第一能力。其中,电子设备还可以显示第二控件,用于将第一能力关闭。电子设备还可以显示隐藏控件,用于将第二控件和/或第二提示信息隐藏。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, after the electronic device activates the first capability, the method further includes: the electronic device displays second prompt information, and the second prompt information is used to prompt the electronic device The first ability has been activated. Wherein, the electronic device may also display a second control for turning off the first ability. The electronic device may also display a hidden control for hiding the second control and/or the second prompt information.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,包括:柔性显示屏、加速度传感器、陀螺仪传感器、一个或多个处理器,一个或多个存储器:所述柔性显示屏、所述加速度传感器、所述陀螺仪传感器、所述一个或多个存储器分别与所述一个或多个处理器耦合;所述加速度传感器和所述陀螺仪传感器,用于检测数据以使得所述一个或多个处理器检测所述柔性显示屏的打开角度;所述柔性显示屏处于折叠形态;所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;所述处理器用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值;启动第一应用或者,开启第一能力。In the second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: a flexible display screen, an acceleration sensor, a gyroscope sensor, one or more processors, and one or more memories: the flexible display screen, the acceleration The sensor, the gyroscope sensor, and the one or more memories are respectively coupled with the one or more processors; the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor are used to detect data so that the one or more The processor detects the opening angle of the flexible display screen; the flexible display screen is in a folded state; the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions; the processor is used to call The computer instructions perform the following operations: detecting that the flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time during which the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold; An application or, the first ability is activated.
第二方面提供的电子设备检测到柔性显示屏停顿在第一角度超过第一时间阈值,就启动第一应用或者开启第一能力。这样,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动应用或者预先开启能力。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用或能力启动所占用的时间,提升用户使用折叠屏设备的体验。另外,无需用户手动操作来启动应用或能力,提高了应用和能力启动的便利性。The electronic device provided by the second aspect detects that the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the first application or starts the first capability. In this way, it is possible to pre-launch the application or pre-launch the capability before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken by the application or ability to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, and improves the user's experience of using the folding screen device. In addition, there is no need for the user to manually operate to start the application or the ability, which improves the convenience of starting the application and the ability.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器具体用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:启动第一应用,并将所述第一应用的用户界面全屏显示或局部显示。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the processor is specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: start a first application, and display the user interface of the first application in full screen or partially.
全屏显示时,用户界面可以是占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。另一种可能的实现方式中,全屏显示时,用户界面占满柔性显示屏的显示区域,可包含导航栏和状态栏。局部显示时,用户界面可以未占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。In full-screen display, the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar. In another possible implementation manner, when the full screen is displayed, the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar. In partial display, the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器启动第一应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:当检测到所述柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,所述电子 设备将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the processor starts the first application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: when it is detected that the flexible display screen is in an expanded configuration, The electronic device displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen or partially.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器启动第一应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:检测所述柔性显示屏展开第二角度,并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第二角度停顿的时间大于或等于所述第二时间阈值;其中,所述第二角度大于所述第一角度,所述第二时间阈值与所述第一时间阈值相同或不同;启动第二应用,所述第二应用不同于所述第一应用,或者启动第二能力,所述第二能力不同于所述第一能力。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the processor starts the first application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: detect that the flexible display screen is expanded at a second angle, and The flexible display screen pauses at the second angle for a time greater than or equal to the second time threshold; wherein, the second angle is greater than the first angle, and the second time threshold is the same as the first time threshold Same or different; start a second application, which is different from the first application, or start a second capability, which is different from the first capability.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器启动第二应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行;或者所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the processor starts the second application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display the user interface of the second application in the flexible Display on the display screen, and run the first application in the background; or the electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示所述第一应用已后台运行。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the processor displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen and runs the first application in the background, the processor further It is used for calling the computer instruction to perform the following operations: displaying first prompt information, the first prompt information being used for prompting that the first application has been running in the background.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器具体用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上分屏显示;或者将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上层叠显示。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the processor is specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display The on-screen split-screen display; or the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application are displayed in a layered manner on the flexible display screen.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备的柔性显示屏在折叠形态下还可处于锁屏状态。当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏在第一角度停顿时间大于或等于第一时间阈值时,电子设备可启动第一应用。当柔性显示屏展开为展开形态时,电子设备可响应于用户输入的指纹、人脸或者密码字符,对用户进行鉴权,鉴权成功则显示第一应用的用户界面。如果鉴权失败,则电子设备可关闭第一应用。其中,锁屏状态下,电子设备需要对用户鉴权(例如验证用户的指纹、人脸或者输入的密码字符)才能解锁,以显示主屏幕界面。In a possible implementation manner, the flexible display screen of the electronic device may also be in a locked screen state in the folded configuration. When the electronic device detects that the pause time of the flexible display at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may start the first application. When the flexible display screen is expanded into an expanded form, the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface of the first application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the first application. Among them, in the locked screen state, the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters) to be unlocked to display the main screen interface.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:确定所述第一角度对应的第一角度区间;根据角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,确定所述第一角度区间对应的所述第一应用。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations: determine the first angle interval corresponding to the first angle; according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application , Determining the first application corresponding to the first angle interval.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值之前,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:在所述柔性显示屏上显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包含角度区间设置入口;进入所述角度区间设置入口后,根据用户操作,为每个角度区间设置对应的应用。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the processor detects that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded configuration to a first angle; and the time that the flexible display screen is paused at the first angle is greater than or equal to Before the first time threshold, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations: display a first user interface on the flexible display screen, the first user interface including an angle interval setting entry; enter the After setting the entrance of the angle interval, according to the user's operation, set the corresponding application for each angle interval.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述角度区间设置入口包含第一设置入口,所述第一设置入口用于修改或删除所述角度区间与所述应用的映射关系。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the angle interval setting entry includes a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述第一用户界面还包括第一开关和/或第二开关;其中,所述第一开关,用于根据应用的启动频率自动开启启动频次最多的应用;或者所述第二开关,用于打开或关闭启动应用的功能。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first user interface further includes a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein, the first switch is used to automatically turn on the most frequently-started application according to the startup frequency of the application. Application; or the second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述第一能力包含以下中的任一个:静音模式、护 眼模式、省电模式和自动截屏。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first capability includes any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
被调整为省电模式之后,电子设备的处理器频率可降低、后台运行应用数量降低、显示屏亮度降低,一些系统功能会被关闭,来节省电量。After being adjusted to the power saving mode, the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power.
被调整为静音模式后,在接收到来电和信息时,电子设备可不进行响铃。在接收到应用的通知消息时也可不进行响铃。在被调整为静音模式下,电子设备的闹钟也可以不进行响铃。After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device may not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It is also possible not to ring when the notification message of the application is received. When adjusted to the silent mode, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
被调整为护眼模式后,电子设备可减少显示屏所显示的图像的蓝光成分,增加黄光的成分,以改变屏幕所显示图像的色调。After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
被配置自动截屏后,电子设备可对所显示的用户界面截取图像。After being configured to automatically take a screenshot, the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,所述处理器启动第一能力之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the processor activates the first capability, the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations:
在所述柔性显示屏上显示第二提示信息,所述第二提示信息用于提示所述电子设备已启动所述第一能力。Displaying second prompt information on the flexible display screen, where the second prompt information is used to prompt that the electronic device has activated the first capability.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片应用于电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a third aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a chip that is applied to an electronic device. The chip includes one or more processors for invoking computer instructions to make the electronic device execute the first aspect and the first aspect. The method described in any possible implementation in one aspect.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当上述计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a fourth aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the first aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners in the first aspect. Described method.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当上述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第一方面以及第一方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which when the instructions are executed on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the first aspect and any possible implementation manner in the first aspect Described method.
可以理解地,上述提供的第二方面提供的电子设备、第三方面提供的芯片、第四方面提供的计算机程序产品和第五方面提供的计算机存储介质均用于执行本申请实施例所提供的方法。因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Understandably, the electronic equipment provided in the second aspect, the chip provided in the third aspect, the computer program product provided in the fourth aspect, and the computer storage medium provided in the fifth aspect provided above are all used to execute the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application. method. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can refer to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, which will not be repeated here.
图1a~图1d是本申请实施例提供的折叠屏设备中柔性显示屏的结构示意图;1a to 1d are schematic diagrams of the structure of a flexible display screen in a folding screen device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2~图9是本申请实施例提供的一些应用界面示意图;Figures 2-9 are schematic diagrams of some application interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的折叠屏设备的应用启动方法的流程示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application of a folding screen device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例所提供的电子设备100的结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请实施例示例性提供的电子设备100的软件结构框图;FIG. 12 is a block diagram of the software structure of an electronic device 100 exemplarily provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请实施例提供的根据柔性显示屏打开角度打开应用的方法流程示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a method for opening an application according to an opening angle of a flexible display screen provided by an embodiment of the present application.
本申请以下实施例中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例的目的,而并非旨在作为对本申请的限制。如在本申请的说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样,单数表达形式“一个”、“一种”、“所述”、“上述”、“该”和“这一”旨在也包括复数表达形式,除非其上下文中明确地有相反指示。还应当理解,本申请中使用的术语“和/或”是指并包含一个 或多个所列出项目的任何或所有可能组合。The terms used in the following embodiments of the present application are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments, and are not intended to limit the present application. As used in the specification and appended claims of this application, the singular expressions "a", "an", "said", "above", "the" and "this" are intended to also Including plural expressions, unless the context clearly indicates to the contrary. It should also be understood that the term "and/or" used in this application refers to and includes any or all possible combinations of one or more of the listed items.
首先,结合附图介绍本申请实施例中与柔性显示屏相关的一些概念,包括柔性显示屏的打开角度、折叠形态、展开形态、局部显示、全屏显示和打开角度停顿。First, some concepts related to the flexible display screen in the embodiments of the present application are introduced in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, including the opening angle, folding form, unfolding form, partial display, full-screen display, and open angle pause of the flexible display screen.
请参阅图1a~图1d,是本申请实施例提供的折叠屏设备中柔性显示屏的结构示意图。该柔性显示屏应用与电子设备。Please refer to FIGS. 1a to 1d, which are schematic structural diagrams of a flexible display screen in a folding screen device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The flexible display screen application and electronic equipment.
(1)打开角度(1) Opening angle
如图1a所示,柔性显示屏可包含A屏和B屏。A屏和B屏通过弯折部位连接。柔性显示屏上,可通过弯折部位将A屏和B屏对折。以折叠形态为参考状态,A屏所在的平面和B屏所在的平面以弯折部位为轴旋转的角度可称为柔性显示屏的打开角度。As shown in Figure 1a, the flexible display screen can include A screen and B screen. The A screen and the B screen are connected by bending parts. On the flexible display screen, the A screen and the B screen can be folded in half through the bending part. Taking the folded form as a reference state, the angle at which the plane where the A screen is located and the plane where the B screen is located rotates around the bending part as the axis can be called the opening angle of the flexible display screen.
本申请实施例中,柔性显示屏的打开角度可在0°~180°之间,也可以在0°~360°之间。In the embodiment of the present application, the opening angle of the flexible display screen may be between 0° and 180°, and may also be between 0° and 360°.
(2)展开形态、折叠形态、局部显示和全屏显示(2) Expanded form, folded form, partial display and full-screen display
本申请实施例中,柔性显示屏可以至少包括两种物理形态:展开形态、折叠形态和支架形态。In the embodiment of the present application, the flexible display screen may include at least two physical forms: an expanded form, a folded form, and a bracket form.
图1a所示的柔性显示屏为展开形态。在展开形态下,柔性显示屏的打开角度为180°±β。即A屏和B屏在同一个平面内,且A屏和B屏展开分布。A屏和B屏通过弯折部位形成连续的显示区域。电子设备可在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域中进行显示。该状态下电子设备全屏显示。其中,β为一个非负的角度值,例如为2°、0°。本申请实施例中,前后文描述的全屏显示,是指在柔性显示屏展开形态时电子设备在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域中进行显示。全屏显示时,用户界面可以是占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。另一种可能的实现方式中,全屏显示时,用户界面占满柔性显示屏的显示区域,可包含导航栏和状态栏。The flexible display screen shown in Figure 1a is in an unfolded form. In the unfolded configuration, the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 180°±β. That is, the A screen and the B screen are in the same plane, and the A screen and the B screen are spread out and distributed. The A screen and the B screen form a continuous display area through the bending part. The electronic device can be displayed in the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen. In this state, the electronic device is displayed in full screen. Among them, β is a non-negative angle value, for example, 2°, 0°. In the embodiments of the present application, the full-screen display described in the following text refers to the display of the electronic device in the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen when the flexible display screen is in an unfolded form. In full-screen display, the user interface may occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar. In another possible implementation manner, when the full screen is displayed, the user interface occupies the display area of the flexible display screen, and may include a navigation bar and a status bar.
图1b和图1c所示的柔性显示屏为折叠形态。如图1b所示,在折叠形态下,柔性显示屏的打开角度为0°+γ,例如打开角度为0°。其中,γ为一个非负的角度值,例如为3°、0°。在打开角度为0°,即柔性显示屏为折叠形态时,电子设备可进行局部显示,示例性的仅在A屏中进行显示,B屏可息屏不显示。折叠形态下,A屏所在的平面和B屏所在的平面平行,且A屏和B屏叠合。局部显示时,用户界面可以未占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域。The flexible display screens shown in Figures 1b and 1c are in a folded form. As shown in Fig. 1b, in the folded configuration, the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 0°+γ, for example, the opening angle is 0°. Among them, γ is a non-negative angle value, for example, 3°, 0°. When the opening angle is 0°, that is, when the flexible display screen is in a folded form, the electronic device can perform partial display. Illustratively, it can only be displayed on the A screen, and the B screen can not be displayed on the screen. In the folded form, the plane where the A screen is located is parallel to the plane where the B screen is located, and the A screen and the B screen are superimposed. In partial display, the user interface may not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar.
不限于打开角度为0°+γ,在折叠形态下,如图1c所示,柔性显示屏的打开角度还可以是360°-δ。其中,δ为一个非负的角度值,例如为1°、0°。当折叠形态下打开角度为0°+γ时,柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中,打开角度逐渐增大,直到增大到180°±β。当折叠形态下打开角度为360°-δ时,柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中,打开角度逐渐减小,直到减小到180°±β。It is not limited to the opening angle of 0°+γ. In the folded configuration, as shown in Fig. 1c, the opening angle of the flexible display screen can also be 360°-δ. Among them, δ is a non-negative angle value, for example, 1°, 0°. When the opening angle in the folded form is 0°+γ, the opening angle of the flexible display screen gradually increases during the unfolding process from the folded form until it increases to 180°±β. When the opening angle in the folded form is 360°-δ, the opening angle of the flexible display screen is gradually reduced during the unfolding process from the folded form until it decreases to 180°±β.
图1d所示的柔性显示屏的打开角度为α。该打开角度是以图1b所示出的折叠形态为参考状态A屏所在的平面和B屏所在的平面以弯折部位为轴旋转的角度。The opening angle of the flexible display screen shown in Fig. 1d is α. The opening angle is the angle that the plane where the A screen is located and the plane where the screen B is located in the folded position shown in FIG. 1b as the reference state, and rotates with the bending part as the axis.
本申请实施例中,在柔性显示屏从折叠形态展开过程中,柔性显示屏偏离折叠形态且展开到展开形态之前的状态可称为支架形态。如图1d所示示例示出了一种支架形态的示例。示例性的,在支架形态下,打开角度α的取值范围可以包含γ<α<180°-β,例如,支架形态下打开角度α可包含30°、45°、90°、150°等。打开角度α的取值范围还可以包含180°+β <α<360°-δ,再例如,支架形态下打开角度α还可包含195°、225°、300°、350°等。In the embodiment of the present application, when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded state, the state before the flexible display screen deviates from the folded state and unfolded to the unfolded state may be referred to as the bracket state. The example shown in Fig. 1d shows an example of a stent form. Exemplarily, in the stent form, the value range of the opening angle α may include γ<α<180°-β, for example, the opening angle α may include 30°, 45°, 90°, 150°, etc. in the stent form. The value range of the opening angle α may also include 180°+β<α<360°-δ. For another example, the opening angle α in the stent form may also include 195°, 225°, 300°, 350°, and so on.
(3)在打开角度位置停顿(3) Pause at the open angle position
本申请实施例中,当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值时,电子设备可确定柔性显示屏在打开角度为该第一角度的位置进行了停顿。其中,该打开角度为第一角度时柔性显示的物理形态可以是支架形态。下面介绍一种确定第一时间阈值的示例。In the embodiment of the present application, when it is detected that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device can determine that the flexible display screen has been opened at the position where the opening angle is the first angle. pause. Wherein, the physical form of the flexible display when the opening angle is the first angle may be a bracket form. The following describes an example of determining the first time threshold.
本申请实施例中,柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在第一角度的时间小于0.3秒时,用户可明显感知到该停顿,因此,第一时间阈值可大于或等于0.3秒。In the embodiment of the present application, when the opening angle of the flexible display screen is maintained at the first angle for less than 0.3 seconds, the user can clearly perceive the pause. Therefore, the first time threshold may be greater than or equal to 0.3 seconds.
另外,柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开为展开形态过程所消耗的平均时间可通过用户操作统计得到。该第一时间阈值可小于该平均时间。具体的,可统计N个测试人员中每个测试人员M次展开过程所消耗的时间,并对这N*M次展开过程所消耗的时间计算平均值得到平均时间,例如平均时间为1.5秒。则该第一时间阈值可小于或等于1.5秒。In addition, the average time consumed in the process of expanding the flexible display screen from the folded form to the unfolded form can be obtained through user operation statistics. The first time threshold may be less than the average time. Specifically, the time consumed by each of the N testers for M expansion processes can be counted, and the average time consumed by the N*M expansion processes can be calculated to obtain the average time, for example, the average time is 1.5 seconds. Then the first time threshold may be less than or equal to 1.5 seconds.
因此,本申请实施例中,可设置第一时间阈值的取值范围为[0.3s,1.5s],例如第一时间阈值为0.5秒。不限于上述取值范围,第一时间阈值还可以是其他的取值,本申请实施例对此不作任何限定。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the value range of the first time threshold can be set to [0.3s, 1.5s], for example, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds. It is not limited to the foregoing value range, and the first time threshold may also be another value, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,该第一时间阈值还可以是电子设备通过多次采集用户在柔性显示屏的一个打开角度保持的时间,然后根据采集到的这多个时间确定的。具体的,在电子设备的一个用户界面上(例如系统设置界面的一个入口对应的界面上),可显示提示:“请将手机从折叠形态展开到展开形态,并在展开中途停顿”。当用户根据上述提示执行操作时,电子设备可采集展开过程中停顿时的停顿时间。电子设备可采集多个停顿时间,然后确定这多个停顿时间的平均值作为第一时间阈值。Optionally, the first time threshold may also be determined by the electronic device through multiple collections of the time that the user maintains at one opening angle of the flexible display screen, and then determined according to the collected multiple times. Specifically, on a user interface of the electronic device (for example, on an interface corresponding to an entrance of the system setting interface), a prompt may be displayed: "Please expand the mobile phone from the folded state to the expanded state, and stop midway through the expansion." When the user performs an operation according to the above prompts, the electronic device can collect the pause time during the pause during the unfolding process. The electronic device may collect multiple pause times, and then determine the average value of the multiple pause times as the first time threshold.
本申请实施例中,当柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开的过程中,在支架形态停顿时,电子设备可根据该支架形态下的打开角度来打开应用,或者根据该支架形态下的打开角度来调整系统配置(例如调整系统配置为省电模式)。In the embodiment of the present application, when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded configuration, the electronic device can open the application according to the opening angle in the bracket configuration or adjust the opening angle according to the opening angle in the bracket configuration when the bracket configuration stops during the process of unfolding the flexible screen System configuration (for example, adjusting the system configuration to power saving mode).
本申请以下实施例提供了一种折叠屏设备中应用打开方法及相关装置。The following embodiments of the application provide a method for opening an application in a folding screen device and related devices.
下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的应用场景。本申请实施例提供的应用打开方法中,电子设备可存储柔性显示屏的打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系。例如,该映射关系包含第一角度区间对应第一应用。电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度为第一角度。当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在该第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,电子设备可获取该第一角度所在的角度区间,为第一角度区间。根据第一角度区间与第一应用之间的映射关系,启动第一应用。The following describes the application scenarios involved in the embodiments of the present application. In the application opening method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device may store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval of the flexible display screen and the application. For example, the mapping relationship includes that the first angle interval corresponds to the first application. The electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle. When it is detected that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may acquire the angle interval in which the first angle is located, which is the first angle interval. According to the mapping relationship between the first angle interval and the first application, the first application is started.
例如,第一时间阈值为0.5秒,且电子设备内存储的打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系包含:90°~135°对应B游戏应用。电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在120°超过0.5秒,则电子设备获取第一角度120°所在的角度区间为90°~135°,然后根据映射关系启动B游戏应用。在电子设备的柔性显示屏展开到展开形态时,即可全屏显示B游戏应用的应用界面。For example, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds, and the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application stored in the electronic device includes: 90°-135° corresponding to the B game application. When the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at 120° for more than 0.5 seconds, the electronic device obtains the first angle of 120° in the angle range of 90° to 135°, and then starts the B game application according to the mapping relationship. When the flexible display screen of the electronic device is unfolded to the unfolded form, the application interface of the B game application can be displayed in full screen.
上述的应用打开过程中,电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度停顿在第一角度超过 第一时间阈值,就启动第一角度所在角度区间对应的应用。这样,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动应用。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间。另外,无需用户手动触摸应用图标来启动应用,提高了应用启动的便利性。During the above-mentioned application opening process, the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, and then starts the application corresponding to the angle interval where the first angle is located. In this way, the application can be started in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form. In addition, the user does not need to manually touch the application icon to start the application, which improves the convenience of starting the application.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的用户界面。The following describes the user interface provided by the embodiment of the present application.
电子设备的柔性显示屏物理形态为折叠形态,则电子设备可局部显示应用界面10。示例性的,以应用界面10为主屏幕界面10为例进行介绍。请参阅图2,图2是本申请实施例提供的一种应用界面示意图。如图2中的(A)所示,电子设备100的A屏显示主屏幕界面10。如图2中的(A)所示,主屏幕界面10包括日历小工具(widget)101、天气小工具102、应用程序图标103、状态栏104以及导航栏105。其中:The physical form of the flexible display screen of the electronic device is a folded form, and the electronic device can partially display the application interface 10. Illustratively, the application interface 10 is taken as the main screen interface 10 as an example for introduction. Please refer to FIG. 2, which is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) in FIG. 2, the A screen of the electronic device 100 displays the main screen interface 10. As shown in (A) in FIG. 2, the main screen interface 10 includes a calendar widget 101, a weather widget 102, an application icon 103, a status bar 104 and a navigation bar 105. among them:
日历小工具101可用于指示当前时间,例如日期、星期几、时分信息等。The calendar widget 101 can be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and so on.
天气小工具102可用于指示天气类型,例如多云转晴、小雨等,还可以用于指示气温等信息,还可以用于指示地点。The weather widget 102 can be used to indicate the type of weather, such as cloudy to clear, light rain, etc., can also be used to indicate information such as temperature, and can also be used to indicate a location.
应用程序图标103可以包含例如微信(Wechat)的图标、推特(Twitter)的图标、脸书(Facebook)的图标、微博(Sina Weibo)的图标、QQ(Tencent QQ)的图标、优兔(YouTube)的图标、图库(Gallery)的图标等,还可以包含其他应用的图标,本申请实施例对此不作限定。任一个应用图标可用于响应用户的操作,例如触摸操作,使得电子设备启动图标对应的应用。The application icon 103 may include, for example, the icon of Wechat, the icon of Twitter, the icon of Facebook (Facebook), the icon of Weibo (Sina Weibo), the icon of QQ (Tencent QQ), the icon of Youtu ( The icon of YouTube), the icon of Gallery (Gallery), etc., may also include icons of other applications, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Any application icon can be used to respond to a user's operation, such as a touch operation, so that the electronic device starts the application corresponding to the icon.
状态栏104中可以包括运营商的名称(例如中国移动)、时间、WI-FI图标、信号强度和当前剩余电量。The status bar 104 may include the name of the operator (for example, China Mobile), time, WI-FI icon, signal strength, and current remaining power.
导航栏105可以包括:返回按键1051、主界面(home screen)按键1052、呼出任务历史按键1053等系统导航键。其中,主屏幕界面10为电子设备100在任何一个用户界面检测到作用于主界面按键1052的用户操作后显示的界面。当检测到用户点击返回按键1051时,电子设备100可显示当前用户界面的上一个用户界面。当检测到用户点击主界面按键1052时,电子设备100可显示主屏幕界面10。当检测到用户点击呼出任务历史按键1053时,电子设备100可显示第一用户最近打开过的任务。各导航键的命名还可以为其他,比如,1051可以叫Back Button,1052可以叫Home button,1053可以叫Menu Button,本申请对此不做限制。导航栏105中的各导航键不限于虚拟按键,也可以实现为物理按键。The navigation bar 105 may include system navigation keys such as a return button 1051, a home screen button 1052, and a call out task history button 1053. The main screen interface 10 is an interface displayed after the electronic device 100 detects a user operation on the main interface button 1052 on any user interface. When it is detected that the user clicks the return button 1051, the electronic device 100 may display the previous user interface of the current user interface. When it is detected that the user clicks the main interface button 1052, the electronic device 100 may display the main screen interface 10. When it is detected that the user clicks on the outgoing task history button 1053, the electronic device 100 may display the task recently opened by the first user. The naming of each navigation key can also be other. For example, 1051 can be called Back Button, 1052 can be called Home button, and 1053 can be called Menu Button, which is not limited in this application. The navigation keys in the navigation bar 105 are not limited to virtual keys, and can also be implemented as physical keys.
电子设备的柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中,电子设备可获取打开角度。When the flexible display screen of the electronic device is unfolded from the folded form, the electronic device can obtain the opening angle.
本申请实施例中,电子设备可存储打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系。示例性的,请参阅表1,是一种打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系的示例。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device may store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application. Exemplarily, please refer to Table 1, which is an example of the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application.
表1、一种打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系的示例Table 1. An example of the mapping relationship between the open angle interval and the application
打开角度区间Open angle interval | 应用application |
0°~45°0°~45° |
微博 |
45°~90°45°~90° |
A游戏 |
90°~135°90°~135° | 图库Gallery |
135°~179°135°~179° | 优兔Youtu |
如表1所示,电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度为第一角度。当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在该第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,电子设备可获取该第一 角度所在的角度区间。如果检测到该第一角度落在0°~45°内,电子设备可根据表一所示出打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,启动微博。As shown in Table 1, the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle. When it is detected that the time during which the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device can obtain the angle interval in which the first angle is located. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 0°˜45°, the electronic device can start the microblog according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1.
类似的,如果检测到该第一角度落在45°~90°内,电子设备可根据表一所示出打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,启动A游戏。如果检测到该第一角度落在90°~135°内,电子设备可根据表一所示出打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,启动图库应用。如果检测到该第一角度落在135°~179°内,电子设备可根据表一所示出打开角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,启动优兔应用。Similarly, if it is detected that the first angle falls within 45°-90°, the electronic device can start the A game according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 90°˜135°, the electronic device can start the gallery application according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1. If it is detected that the first angle falls within 135°˜179°, the electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the application shown in Table 1.
示例性的,第一时间阈值为0.5秒。基于表一,当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度α在110°停顿时间大于或等于0.5秒时,电子设备确定该110°所在的角度区间为90°~135°。如图2中的(B)所示,电子设备根据该角度区间90°~135°和表一所示映射关系启动图库应用,并在A屏和B屏上全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20。在本申请的一些实施例中,如果图库应用已被后台运行,则电子设备在A屏和B屏上全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20。Exemplarily, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds. Based on Table 1, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle α of the flexible display screen is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds at 110°, the electronic device determines that the angle interval of 110° is 90°-135°. As shown in (B) of FIG. 2, the electronic device starts the gallery application according to the angle range of 90° to 135° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1, and displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen on screens A and B. In some embodiments of the present application, if the gallery application has been running in the background, the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen on the A screen and the B screen.
如图2中的(B)和(C)所示,图库应用的用户界面20可包含缩略图显示区201,该缩略图显示区201可包含多张图片的缩略图。用户可触摸缩略图来打开对应的图片。As shown in (B) and (C) in FIG. 2, the user interface 20 of the gallery application may include a thumbnail display area 201, and the thumbnail display area 201 may include thumbnails of multiple pictures. The user can touch the thumbnail to open the corresponding picture.
如图2中的(C)所示,当柔性显示屏展开为展开形态,即第一角度为180°时,电子设备可全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20。这样,可实现在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动图库应用。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间。另外,无需用户手动找到并触摸图库应用图标来启动应用,提高了应用启动的便利性。As shown in FIG. 2(C), when the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the first angle is 180°, the electronic device can display the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen. In this way, it is possible to start the gallery application in advance before the flexible display screen is opened to the expanded form. This reduces the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the gallery application icon to start the application, which improves the convenience of starting the application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,如果电子设备检测到在柔性显示屏展开过程中,在多个角度停顿超过时间阈值,且这多个角度所在的角度区间不同,电子设备可启动这多个角度区间所对应的应用,并将最后启动的应用的界面在前台显示。先后启动的两个应用中,在先启动的应用可以是第一应用,在后启动的应用可以是第二应用。第二应用不同于第一应用,例如第二应用为优兔应用,第一应用为图库应用。In a possible implementation, if the electronic device detects that during the unfolding process of the flexible display screen, multiple angles pause for more than the time threshold, and the multiple angles are in different angle intervals, the electronic device can activate the multiple angles The application corresponding to the interval, and the interface of the last launched application is displayed in the foreground. Among the two applications that are started one after another, the application that is started first may be the first application, and the application that is started later may be the second application. The second application is different from the first application. For example, the second application is the Youtu application and the first application is the gallery application.
本申请实施例中,先后停顿的两个角度所设置的时间阈值可以相同也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。先后停顿的两个角度中,针对于在先的角度,电子设备可设置第一时间阈值。针对于在后的角度,电子设备可设置第二时间阈值。例如第一时间阈值和第二时间阈值均为0.5秒,再例如第一时间阈值为0.5秒,第二时间阈值为0.6秒。In the embodiment of the present application, the time thresholds set for the two angles that are paused successively may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Among the two angles that are paused one after another, the electronic device may set the first time threshold for the previous angle. For the later angle, the electronic device can set a second time threshold. For example, the first time threshold and the second time threshold are both 0.5 seconds, and for another example, the first time threshold is 0.5 seconds, and the second time threshold is 0.6 seconds.
具体的,请参阅图3,图3是本申请实施例提供的一种应用界面示意图。例如,图2中的(A)和(B)所示示例中,电子设备根据打开角度110°所落在的角度区间90°~135°和表一所示映射关系启动图库应用,并在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域上全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20。Specifically, please refer to FIG. 3, which is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. For example, in the example shown in (A) and (B) in Figure 2, the electronic device starts the gallery application according to the angle range of 90°~135° where the opening angle of 110° falls and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1. The user interface 20 of the gallery application is displayed in full screen on the display area composed of the screen and the B screen.
如图2中的(B)和图3中的(A)所示,在打开并全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20之后,在柔性显示屏展开为展开形态之前,电子设备可检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度α在150°停顿时间大于或等于0.5秒。电子设备确定打开角度150°所在的角度区间为135°~179°。电子设备可根据该角度区间135°~179°和表一所示映射关系启动优兔应用,并将图库应用后台运行,在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域上全屏显示优兔的用户界面30。As shown in FIG. 2(B) and FIG. 3(A), after opening and displaying the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen, the electronic device can detect the flexible display screen before the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form The opening angle α at 150° pause time is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds. The electronic device determines that the angle interval where the opening angle is 150° is 135°~179°. The electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the angle range of 135°~179° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1, and run the gallery application in the background, and display the Youtu user interface in full screen on the display area composed of screen A and screen B 30 .
其中,图库应用后台运行是指,图库应用已经被启动且未被电子设备关闭。响应于用户打开图库应用的操作(例如对图库图标的触摸操作),电子设备可无需重新启动图库应用,利用后台运行的图库应用显示图库应用的用户界面20。Among them, the background running of the gallery application means that the gallery application has been activated and has not been closed by the electronic device. In response to the user's operation of opening the gallery application (for example, a touch operation on the gallery icon), the electronic device may use the gallery application running in the background to display the user interface 20 of the gallery application without restarting the gallery application.
如图3中的(A)和(B)所示,优兔的用户界面30可包含菜单控件:精选菜单301、动漫菜单302、热点菜单303、剧集菜单304、电影菜单305、少儿菜单306、综艺菜单307和纪录片菜单308。用户界面30还可包含内容显示区3011。内容显示区3011显示的内容是精选菜单301下的内容。用户界面30还可包含搜索框309,用于响应于用户在搜索框209中搜索的关键词,显示关键词相关的视频列表。搜索框309中还可默认显示热门搜索关键词,例如“长安十二时辰”。As shown in (A) and (B) in Figure 3, the user interface 30 of Youtu may include menu controls: Featured Menu 301, Anime Menu 302, Hotspot Menu 303, Episode Menu 304, Movie Menu 305, Children's Menu 306. Variety menu 307 and documentary menu 308. The user interface 30 may also include a content display area 3011. The content displayed in the content display area 3011 is the content under the selected menu 301. The user interface 30 may also include a search box 309 for displaying a list of videos related to the keyword in response to the keyword searched by the user in the search box 209. The search box 309 may also display popular search keywords by default, such as "Twelve Hours in Chang'an".
内容显示区3011可包含控件3011a、控件3011b、控件3011c、控件3011d、控件3011e和控件3011f,分别用于响应于用户的触摸操作,使得电子设备显示控件对应的视频列表。The content display area 3011 may include a control 3011a, a control 3011b, a control 3011c, a control 3011d, a control 3011e, and a control 3011f, which are respectively used to make the electronic device display a video list corresponding to the control in response to a user's touch operation.
如图3中的(B)所示,当电子设备的柔性显示屏展开为展开形态,即打开角度α为180°时,电子设备可全屏显示优兔的用户界面30。As shown in (B) of FIG. 3, when the flexible display screen of the electronic device is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the opening angle α is 180°, the electronic device can display the user interface 30 of Youtu in full screen.
可选的,如图3中的(B)所示,电子设备还可以显示提示界面40,包含后台运行应用图标401,关闭控件402和隐藏控件403。其中:Optionally, as shown in FIG. 3(B), the electronic device may also display a prompt interface 40, which includes a background running application icon 401, a close control 402, and a hidden control 403. among them:
应用图标401,用于提示后台运行的图库应用。用户可触摸应用图标401,以使得电子设备响应于上述作用于应用图标401的触摸操作,根据后台运行的图库应用,显示图库应用的用户界面20。该应用图标401即为第一提示信息。The application icon 401 is used to prompt a gallery application running in the background. The user can touch the application icon 401, so that the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery application according to the gallery application running in the background in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the application icon 401. The application icon 401 is the first prompt message.
关闭控件402,用于关闭后台运行的图库应用。用户可触摸关闭控件402,以使得电子设备响应于上述作用于关闭控件402的触摸操作,关闭后台运行的图库应用。The close control 402 is used to close the gallery application running in the background. The user can touch the close control 402, so that the electronic device closes the gallery application running in the background in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the close control 402.
隐藏控件403,用于隐藏提示界面40。用户可触摸隐藏控件403,使得电子设备响应于上述作用于隐藏控件403的触摸操作,隐藏提示界面40,提示界面40被隐藏后,电子设备仍然可以后台运行图库应用。The hidden control 403 is used to hide the prompt interface 40. The user can touch the hidden control 403, so that the electronic device hides the prompt interface 40 in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the hidden control 403. After the prompt interface 40 is hidden, the electronic device can still run the gallery application in the background.
在柔性显示屏打开到展开形态之前,预先启动图库应用和优兔应用。这样,可减小柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间。另外,无需用户手动找到并触摸优兔图标来启动优兔应用,提高了应用启动的便利性。Before the flexible display is opened to the unfolded form, the gallery application and the Youtu application are activated in advance. In this way, the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form can be reduced. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the Youtu icon to start the Youtu application, which improves the convenience of application startup.
本申请实施例中,图库应用可以是第一应用,优兔应用可以是第二应用。可选的,当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏在第一角度(110°)停顿超过第一时间阈值,电子设备可后台启动第一应用,例如图库应用。当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏在第二角度(150°)停顿超过第一时间阈值,电子设备可后台启动第二应用,例如优兔应用。当检测到柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,电子设备才将第二应用的用户界面(即优兔的用户界面30)在柔性显示屏上显示出来,可以全屏显示,也可以局部显示。In this embodiment of the application, the gallery application may be the first application, and the Youtu application may be the second application. Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen pauses at a first angle (110°) and exceeds a first time threshold, the electronic device may start the first application in the background, such as a gallery application. When the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen pauses at the second angle (150°) and exceeds the first time threshold, the electronic device may start a second application in the background, such as the Youtu application. When detecting that the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form, the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application (ie, the user interface 30 of Youtu) on the flexible display screen, which can be displayed in full screen or partially.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在图3中的(A)所示示例将图库应用后台运行之后,电子设备也可以显示提示界面40。In a possible implementation manner, after the image gallery application is running in the background in the example shown in (A) of FIG. 3, the electronic device may also display the prompt interface 40.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备在检测到运行内存剩余量小于设定阈值时,可将后台运行的图库应用关闭。In a possible implementation manner, when the electronic device detects that the remaining amount of running memory is less than the set threshold, the gallery application running in the background may be closed.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,如果电子设备检测到在柔性显示屏展开过程中,在多个角度停顿超过第一时间阈值,且这多个角度所在的角度区间不同,电子设备可启动这多个 角度区间所对应的应用,并显示这多个应用的用户界面。In some other embodiments of the present application, if the electronic device detects that during the unfolding process of the flexible display screen, multiple angles are paused and exceed the first time threshold, and the multiple angles are in different angle intervals, the electronic device can start this Applications corresponding to multiple angle intervals, and display the user interfaces of these multiple applications.
具体的,请参阅图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的一些应用界面的示意图。前例中,在打开图库应用并全屏显示图库应用的用户界面20之后,在柔性显示屏展开为展开形态之前,电子设备可检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度α在150°停顿时间大于或等于0.5秒。电子设备确定打开角度150°所在的角度区间为135°~179°。电子设备可根据该角度区间135°~179°和表一所示映射关系启动优兔应用。如图4中的(A)所示,电子设备将图库应用的用户界面20(第一应用的用户界面)和优兔的用户界面30(第二应用的用户界面)部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏。例如,将图库应用的用户界面20和优兔的用户界面30在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域上层叠显示。响应于检测到的作用在其中一个用户界面的用户操作,例如作用在优兔的用户界面30的用户操作,电子设备全屏显示优兔的用户界面30,优兔的用户界面30参考如图3中的(B)所描述示例。Specifically, please refer to FIG. 4, which is a schematic diagram of some application interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application. In the previous example, after opening the gallery application and displaying the user interface 20 of the gallery application in full screen, the electronic device can detect that the opening angle α of the flexible display screen is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds before the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form. . The electronic device determines that the angle interval where the opening angle is 150° is 135°~179°. The electronic device can start the Youtu application according to the angle range of 135°~179° and the mapping relationship shown in Table 1. As shown in (A) in FIG. 4, the electronic device displays part or all of the user interface 20 of the gallery application (the user interface of the first application) and the user interface 30 of Youtu (the user interface of the second application) on the Flexible display. For example, the user interface 20 of the gallery application and the user interface 30 of Youtu are displayed in a layered manner on the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen. In response to the detected user operation acting on one of the user interfaces, for example, the user operation acting on the user interface 30 of Youtu, the electronic device displays the user interface 30 of Youtu in full screen. Refer to the user interface 30 of Youtu as shown in FIG. 3 The example described in (B).
在另一种实施例中,如图4中的(B)所示,电子设备将图库的用户界面20和优兔的用户界面30在A屏和B屏组成的显示区域上分屏显示。用户可对用户界面20和用户界面30进行操作,电子设备可进行响应。响应于作用在用户界面20上图片的缩略图的触摸操作,电子设备可在用户界面20所在的显示区域中显示缩略图对应的图片。响应于作用在用户界面30上控件的触摸操作,电子设备可在用户界面30所在的显示区域中显示控件对应的视频。In another embodiment, as shown in (B) of FIG. 4, the electronic device displays the user interface 20 of the gallery and the user interface 30 of Youtu on the display area composed of the A screen and the B screen in a split screen. The user can operate the user interface 20 and the user interface 30, and the electronic device can respond. In response to a touch operation acting on the thumbnail of the picture on the user interface 20, the electronic device may display the picture corresponding to the thumbnail in the display area where the user interface 20 is located. In response to the touch operation of the control on the user interface 30, the electronic device may display the video corresponding to the control in the display area where the user interface 30 is located.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏在第一角度停顿超过第一时间阈值,电子设备可仅启动第一应用,例如图库应用。当检测到柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,电子设备才将第一应用的用户界面(即图库的用户界面20)在柔性显示屏上显示出来。In some embodiments of the present application, when the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen pauses at the first angle and exceeds the first time threshold, the electronic device may only start the first application, such as a gallery application. When it is detected that the flexible display screen is in the expanded state, the electronic device displays the user interface of the first application (ie, the user interface 20 of the gallery) on the flexible display screen.
不限于图2中的(C)在柔性显示屏上全屏显示图库的用户界面20,还可以是在柔性显示屏上局部显示。示例性的,如图4中的(C)所示,示出了一种图库的用户界面20在柔性显示屏上局部显示的示例,图库的用户界面20可以和主屏幕界面50在柔性显示屏上分屏显示。It is not limited to (C) the user interface 20 that displays the gallery in full screen on the flexible display screen in FIG. 2, and may also be partially displayed on the flexible display screen. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 4(C), an example of a partial display of the user interface 20 of the gallery on the flexible display screen is shown. The user interface 20 of the gallery may be displayed on the flexible display screen with the main screen interface 50. The upper split screen display.
本申请实施例中,未占满柔性显示屏上除导航栏和状态栏以外的显示区域的情形,均可以称为局部显示。本申请实施例对局部显示的显示方式不作限定。In the embodiments of the present application, the situation that does not occupy the display area on the flexible display screen except for the navigation bar and the status bar can be referred to as partial display. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the display mode of the partial display.
如果电子设备检测到在柔性显示屏展开过程中,在多个角度停顿超过时间阈值,且这多个角度所在的角度区间不同,电子设备可先后启动这多个角度区间所对应的系统配置,并使用最后开启的系统配置。先后开启的两个系统配置中,在先开启的系统配置可以是第一能力,在后开启的系统配置可以是第二能力。第二能力不同于第一能力,例如第二能力为省电模式,第一能力为静音模式。If the electronic device detects that during the unfolding process of the flexible display screen, multiple angles pause for more than the time threshold, and the multiple angles are in different angle intervals, the electronic device can start the system configuration corresponding to the multiple angle intervals successively, and Use the last-on system configuration. In the two system configurations that are turned on one after another, the system configuration that is turned on first may be the first ability, and the system configuration that is turned on later may be the second ability. The second ability is different from the first ability. For example, the second ability is a power saving mode, and the first ability is a silent mode.
本申请实施例中,先后停顿的两个角度所设置的时间阈值可以相同也可以不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。先后停顿的两个角度中,针对于在先的角度,电子设备可设置第一时间阈值。针对于在后的角度,电子设备可设置第二时间阈值。例如第一时间阈值和第二时间阈值均为0.45秒,再例如第一时间阈值为0.4秒,第二时间阈值为0.7秒。In the embodiment of the present application, the time thresholds set for the two angles that are paused successively may be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Among the two angles that are paused one after another, the electronic device may set the first time threshold for the previous angle. For the later angle, the electronic device can set a second time threshold. For example, the first time threshold and the second time threshold are both 0.45 seconds, and for another example, the first time threshold is 0.4 seconds, and the second time threshold is 0.7 seconds.
在一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备的柔性显示屏在折叠形态下还可处于锁屏状态, 即电子设备需要对用户鉴权(例如验证用户的指纹、人脸或者输入的密码字符)才能解锁,以显示主屏幕界面10。如果电子设备在折叠形态下处于锁屏状态,当电子设备检测到打开角度α在110°停顿时间大于或等于0.5秒时,电子设备可启动图库应用。当柔性显示屏展开为展开形态时,电子设备可响应于用户输入的指纹、人脸或者密码字符,对用户进行鉴权,鉴权成功则显示图库应用的用户界面20。如果鉴权失败,则电子设备可关闭图库应用。In a possible implementation, the flexible display screen of the electronic device can also be in a locked state in the folded form, that is, the electronic device needs to authenticate the user (for example, verify the user's fingerprint, face, or input password characters). Unlock to display the main screen interface 10. If the electronic device is in the locked screen state in the folded configuration, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle α is greater than or equal to 0.5 seconds at the 110° pause time, the electronic device can start the gallery application. When the flexible display screen is expanded into an expanded form, the electronic device can authenticate the user in response to the fingerprint, face, or password characters input by the user, and if the authentication succeeds, the user interface 20 of the gallery application is displayed. If the authentication fails, the electronic device can close the gallery application.
这样,可实现在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之前,预先启动图库应用。从而减小了柔性显示屏处在展开形态之后应用启动所占用的时间。另外,无需用户手动找到并触摸图库应用图标来启动应用,提高了应用启动的便利性。In this way, it is possible to start the gallery application in advance before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form. This reduces the time taken for the application to start after the flexible display screen is in the unfolded form. In addition, the user does not need to manually find and touch the gallery application icon to start the application, which improves the convenience of starting the application.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,电子设备还可以存储打开角度区间和系统配置之间的映射关系。系统配置例如可包含静音模式、护眼模式、省电模式和自动截屏。示例性的,请参阅表2,是一种打开角度区间与系统配置之间的映射关系的示例。In some other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may also store the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the system configuration. The system configuration may include, for example, silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screenshots. Exemplarily, please refer to Table 2, which is an example of the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the system configuration.
表2、一种打开角度区间与系统配置之间的映射关系的示例Table 2. An example of the mapping relationship between the opening angle interval and the system configuration
打开角度区间Open angle interval | 系统配置System Configuration |
0°~45°0°~45° |
静音模式 |
45°~90°45°~90° |
护眼模式 |
90°~135°90°~135° | 省电模式Power saving mode |
135°~179°135°~179° | 自动截屏Auto screenshot |
本申请实施例前后文中,上述的系统配置也可称为电子设备的能力。第一系统配置可称为第一能力。In the context of the embodiments of the present application, the above-mentioned system configuration may also be referred to as the capability of an electronic device. The first system configuration may be referred to as the first capability.
如表2所示,电子设备检测柔性显示屏的打开角度为第一角度。当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在该第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,电子设备可获取该第一角度所在的角度区间,为第一角度区间。根据第一角度区间与第一系统配置之间的映射关系,将第一系统配置应用于电子设备,即电子设备启动第一系统配置。As shown in Table 2, the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the first angle. When it is detected that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may acquire the angle interval in which the first angle is located, which is the first angle interval. According to the mapping relationship between the first angle interval and the first system configuration, the first system configuration is applied to the electronic device, that is, the electronic device starts the first system configuration.
例如,第一角度是120°,第一角度区间为90°~135°,第一系统配置为省电模式,第一时间阈值为0.4秒。电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在120°的时间大于或等于0.4秒,可获取120°所在的角度区间,为90°~135°。电子设备根据90°~135°与省电模式之间的映射关系,将系统配置调整为省电模式。如果当前电子设备已经处在省电模式,则电子设备仍然保持系统配置为省电模式。For example, the first angle is 120°, the first angle interval is 90°-135°, the first system is configured in the power saving mode, and the first time threshold is 0.4 seconds. The electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at 120° for a time greater than or equal to 0.4 seconds, and the angular interval of 120° can be obtained, which is 90°-135°. The electronic device adjusts the system configuration to the power saving mode according to the mapping relationship between 90°~135° and the power saving mode. If the current electronic device is already in the power saving mode, the electronic device still keeps the system configured in the power saving mode.
上述调整为省电模式的过程,可实现在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之前,电子设备预先根据第一角度和映射关系调整省电模式。另外,无需用户手动操作来进行省电模式的调整,提高了便利性。The foregoing process of adjusting to the power saving mode can realize that the electronic device adjusts the power saving mode in advance according to the first angle and the mapping relationship before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form. In addition, manual operation by the user is not required to adjust the power saving mode, which improves the convenience.
可以理解的,本申请实施例以柔性显示屏展开过程中调整电子设备为省电模式为例进行介绍,静音模式、护眼模式和自动截屏的过程类似。It is understandable that the embodiment of the present application takes the adjustment of the electronic device to the power saving mode during the unfolding process of the flexible display screen as an example for introduction, and the silent mode, the eye protection mode and the automatic screen capture process are similar.
下面对本申请实施例提供的各个系统配置进行介绍。The following describes each system configuration provided by the embodiment of the present application.
被调整为省电模式之后,电子设备的处理器频率可降低、后台运行应用数量降低、显示屏亮度降低,一些系统功能会被关闭,来节省电量。不限于上述举例,电子设备还可以 执行其他操作以节省电量,例如停止应用后台自动刷新等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。After being adjusted to the power saving mode, the processor frequency of the electronic device can be reduced, the number of applications running in the background is reduced, the brightness of the display screen is reduced, and some system functions will be turned off to save power. Not limited to the above examples, the electronic device may also perform other operations to save power, such as stopping the automatic background refresh of the application, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
被调整为静音模式后,在接收到来电和信息时,电子设备不进行响铃。在接收到应用的通知消息时也不进行响铃。本申请实施例对静音模式不作限定,例如在被调整为静音模式下,电子设备的闹钟还可以不进行响铃。After being adjusted to the silent mode, the electronic device will not ring when receiving incoming calls and messages. It does not ring when the notification message of the application is received. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the silent mode. For example, when the silent mode is adjusted, the alarm clock of the electronic device may not ring.
被调整为护眼模式后,电子设备可减少显示屏所显示的图像的蓝光成分,增加黄光的成分,以改变屏幕所显示图像的色调。After being adjusted to the eye protection mode, the electronic device can reduce the blue light component of the image displayed on the display screen and increase the yellow light component to change the color tone of the image displayed on the screen.
被配置自动截屏后,电子设备可对所显示的用户界面截取图像。After being configured to automatically take a screenshot, the electronic device can take a screenshot of the displayed user interface.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备在根据第一角度区间与第一系统配置之间的映射关系将第一系统配置应用于电子设备之后,可显示提示,以提示当前已切换到第一系统配置。In the embodiment of the present application, after the electronic device applies the first system configuration to the electronic device according to the mapping relationship between the first angle interval and the first system configuration, it may display a prompt to prompt that it has switched to the first system configuration. .
示例性的,如图2中的(A)所示,在柔性显示屏为折叠形态时,电子设备可局部显示主屏幕界面10。电子设备可存储表2所示映射关系。柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中,电子设备可获取打开角度。电子设备检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在120°的时间大于或等于0.4秒,可获取120°所在的角度区间,为90°~135°。根据90°~135°与省电模式之间的映射关系,电子设备调整为省电模式。请参阅图5,图5为本申请实施例提供的一种应用界面的示意图。如图5所示,当柔性显示屏展开为展开形态,即第一角度为180°时,电子设备可全屏显示主屏幕界面50。主屏幕界面50和主屏幕界面10上应用图标布局可不同。Exemplarily, as shown in (A) of FIG. 2, when the flexible display screen is in a folded form, the electronic device may partially display the main screen interface 10. The electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 2. During the process of unfolding the flexible display screen from the folded form, the electronic device can obtain the opening angle. The electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is kept at 120° for a time greater than or equal to 0.4 seconds, and the angular interval of 120° can be obtained, which is 90°-135°. According to the mapping relationship between 90°~135° and the power saving mode, the electronic device is adjusted to the power saving mode. Please refer to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 5, when the flexible display screen is unfolded into an unfolded form, that is, when the first angle is 180°, the electronic device can display the main screen interface 50 in full screen. The layout of the application icons on the home screen interface 50 and the home screen interface 10 may be different.
如图5所示,电子设备还显示系统配置提示界面60,该系统配置提示界面60可包含省电模式图标601,关闭控件602和隐藏控件603。其中:As shown in FIG. 5, the electronic device also displays a system configuration prompt interface 60. The system configuration prompt interface 60 may include a power saving mode icon 601, a close control 602, and a hidden control 603. among them:
省电模式图标601,用于提示已切换到省电模式。用户可触摸省电模式图标601,以使得电子设备响应于上述作用于省电模式图标601的触摸操作,显示系统设置界面。The power saving mode icon 601 is used to indicate that the power saving mode has been switched to. The user can touch the power-saving mode icon 601, so that the electronic device displays the system setting interface in response to the above-mentioned touch operation on the power-saving mode icon 601.
关闭控件602,用于关闭省电模式。用户可触摸关闭控件602,以使得电子设备响应于上述作用于关闭控件602的触摸操作,关闭省电模式,恢复到柔性显示屏为折叠形态时的系统配置。The close control 602 is used to close the power saving mode. The user can touch the close control 602, so that the electronic device, in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the close control 602, closes the power saving mode, and returns to the system configuration when the flexible display screen is in a folded form.
隐藏控件603,用于隐藏提示界面60。用户可触摸隐藏控件603,使得电子设备响应于上述作用于隐藏控件603的触摸操作,隐藏系统配置提示界面60,系统配置提示界面60被隐藏后,电子设备仍然处于省电模式。The hidden control 603 is used to hide the prompt interface 60. The user can touch the hidden control 603, so that the electronic device hides the system configuration prompt interface 60 in response to the aforementioned touch operation on the hidden control 603. After the system configuration prompt interface 60 is hidden, the electronic device is still in the power saving mode.
在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之前,预先将电子设备调整为省电模式。从而无需用户手动找到对应图标并通过图标调整为省电模式,提高了便利性。Before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form, the electronic device is adjusted to a power saving mode in advance. There is no need for the user to manually find the corresponding icon and adjust the icon to the power saving mode, which improves the convenience.
本申请实施例中,不限于通过系统配置提示界面60显示省电模式图标601,关闭控件602和隐藏控件603。请参阅图6,图6是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的界面示意图。如图7中的(A)和(B)所示,省电模式图标601,关闭控件602和隐藏控件603还可以通过下拉菜单70或上拉菜单80显示,不限于此,还可以通过侧拉菜单或悬浮菜单显示,本申请实施例对此不做任何限制。In the embodiment of the present application, it is not limited to displaying the power saving mode icon 601, closing the control 602 and hiding the control 603 through the system configuration prompt interface 60. Please refer to FIG. 6, which is a schematic diagram of an interface of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) and (B) in Figure 7, the power-saving mode icon 601, the close control 602 and the hidden control 603 can also be displayed through the pull-down menu 70 or the pull-up menu 80. It is not limited to this, and can also be displayed by side dragging. The menu or floating menu is displayed, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any restriction on this.
本申请实施例中,第二提示信息可包含图5所示出的省电模式图标601、图6中的(B)所示出的省电模式图标601和图6中的(A)所示出的省电模式图标601。In the embodiment of the present application, the second prompt information may include the power saving mode icon 601 shown in FIG. 5, the power saving mode icon 601 shown in (B) in FIG. 6, and the power saving mode icon 601 shown in (A) in FIG. Power saving mode icon 601 out.
本申请实施例中,表1和表2所示出示例可以是系统设置相关界面上响应于用户操作设置的。具体的,请参阅图7和图8,图7和图8分别是本申请实施例提供的一种应用界 面的示意图。如图7中的(A)所示,为系统设置界面90。系统设置界面90包含多个系统功能设置入口,这多个系统功能设置入口可包含智能辅助设置入口901。In the embodiments of the present application, the examples shown in Table 1 and Table 2 may be set in response to user operations on the system setting related interface. Specifically, please refer to Figs. 7 and 8. Figs. 7 and 8 are respectively schematic diagrams of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) in FIG. 7, it is a system setting interface 90. The system setting interface 90 includes a plurality of system function setting portals, and the plurality of system function setting portals may include an intelligent auxiliary setting portal 901.
如图7中的(A)和(B)所示,响应于作用于智能辅助设置入口901的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示智能辅助设置界面1000。智能辅助设置界面1000可包含多个功能设置入口。这多个功能设置入口例如可包含智慧识屏1001、语音控制1002、折叠屏角度控制1003、手势控制1004和定时关机1005。As shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 7, in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the intelligent auxiliary setting portal 901, the electronic device displays the intelligent auxiliary setting interface 1000. The intelligent auxiliary setting interface 1000 may include multiple function setting entries. The multiple function setting entries may include, for example, smart screen recognition 1001, voice control 1002, folding screen angle control 1003, gesture control 1004, and timing shutdown 1005.
如图7中的(B)和(C)所示,响应于作用于折叠屏角度控制1003的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示折叠屏角度控制界面1100。折叠屏角度控制界面1100可包含折叠屏角度控制开关1101和多个角度区间设置入口。这多个角度区间设置入口例如可包含0-45°设置入口1102、45-90°设置入口1103、90-135°设置入口1104和135-179°设置入口1105。角度区间设置入口可用于修改或删除角度区间与应用的映射关系。As shown in (B) and (C) in FIG. 7, in response to a user operation acting on the folding screen angle control 1003, such as a touch operation, the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control interface 1100. The folding screen angle control interface 1100 may include a folding screen angle control switch 1101 and multiple angle interval setting entries. The multiple angle interval setting entrances may include, for example, a 0-45° setting entrance 1102, a 45-90° setting entrance 1103, a 90-135° setting entrance 1104, and a 135-179° setting entrance 1105. The angle interval setting entry can be used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
如图7中的(C)所示,折叠屏角度控制开关1101可显示关闭状态,响应于作用于折叠屏角度控制开关1101的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示折叠屏角度控制开关1101为打开状态。可选的,折叠屏角度控制开关1101在关闭状态下,多个角度区间设置入口不能响应用户的操作,而在打开状态下能够响应用户的操作。As shown in FIG. 7(C), the folding screen angle control switch 1101 can display a closed state. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the folding screen angle control switch 1101, the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control switch 1101 as Open state. Optionally, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the multiple angle interval setting entrances cannot respond to the user's operation, but can respond to the user's operation in the open state.
其中,0-45°设置入口1102还可以包含提示1102a,用于提示“未设置”。45-90°设置入口1103还可以包含提示1103a,用于提示“未设置”。90-135°设置入口1104还可以包含提示1104a,用于提示“未设置”。135-179°设置入口1105还可以包含提示1105a,用于提示“未设置”。Among them, the 0-45° setting entrance 1102 may also include a prompt 1102a for prompting "not set". The 45-90° setting entrance 1103 may also include a prompt 1103a for prompting "not set". The 90-135° setting entrance 1104 may also include a prompt 1104a for prompting "not set". The 135-179° setting entrance 1105 may also include a prompt 1105a for prompting "not set".
如图7中的(C)和(D)所示,响应于作用于0-45°设置入口1102的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示0-45°设置界面1200。0-45°设置界面1200可包含应用设置控件1201、系统配置控件1202、图标显示区1203和返回控件1204。应用设置控件1201和系统配置控件1202各自对应有内容显示区。其中,图标显示区1203为应用设置控件1201对应的图标显示区。响应于作用于系统配置控件1202的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示系统配置控件1202对应的内容显示区,具体参考图8中的(B)的描述。As shown in (C) and (D) in FIG. 7, in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the 0-45° setting entry 1102, the electronic device displays a 0-45° setting interface 1200. 0-45° setting The interface 1200 may include an application setting control 1201, a system configuration control 1202, an icon display area 1203, and a return control 1204. The application setting control 1201 and the system configuration control 1202 respectively correspond to a content display area. Among them, the icon display area 1203 is an icon display area corresponding to the application setting control 1201. In response to a user operation on the system configuration control 1202, such as a touch operation, the electronic device displays the content display area corresponding to the system configuration control 1202. For details, refer to the description of (B) in FIG. 8.
返回控件1204,用于返回0-45°设置界面1200的上一级界面。响应于作用于返回控件1204的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示折叠屏角度控制界面1100。The return control 1204 is used to return to the previous interface of the 0-45° setting interface 1200. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the return control 1204, the electronic device displays the folding screen angle control interface 1100.
示例性的,如图7中(D)所示,图标显示区1203可包含微博图标1203a、推特图标1203b、图库图标1203c、A游戏图标1203d、B游戏图标1203e、微信图标1203f、脸书1203g、QQ图标1203h和空图标1203i。不限于这些应用图标,响应于用户对图标显示区1203的触摸滑动操作,电子设备可显示更多的应用图标。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7(D), the icon display area 1203 may include a Weibo icon 1203a, a Twitter icon 1203b, a gallery icon 1203c, A game icon 1203d, B game icon 1203e, WeChat icon 1203f, Facebook 1203g, QQ icon 1203h, and empty icon 1203i. It is not limited to these application icons. In response to the user's touch and sliding operation on the icon display area 1203, the electronic device can display more application icons.
用户可对图标显示区1203中任一个图标进行操作,例如触摸操作,来设定该0-45°所对应的应用。示例性的,如图7中的(D)所示,图标显示区1203中的应用图标显示未被选中状态,响应于作用于微博图标1203a的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示微博图标1203a为选中状态。如图8中的(A)所示,响应于作用于返回控件1204的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示折叠屏角度控制界面1100。如图8中的(A)所示,0-45°区间设置入口1102可不再显示提示1102a,而是显示提示1102b,用于提示“微博”。The user can operate any icon in the icon display area 1203, such as a touch operation, to set the application corresponding to the 0-45°. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 7(D), the application icon in the icon display area 1203 is displayed in an unselected state. In response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, on the microblog icon 1203a, the electronic device displays the microblog The icon 1203a is selected. As shown in (A) of FIG. 8, in response to a user operation, such as a touch operation, acting on the return control 1204, the electronic device displays a folding screen angle control interface 1100. As shown in (A) in Fig. 8, the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 may no longer display the prompt 1102a, but display the prompt 1102b, which is used to prompt "Weibo".
当用户在图标显示区1203中触摸空图标1203i,响应于该用户操作,电子设备可显示 空图标1203i为选中状态,表示电子设备设定该0-45°区间不对应任何应用。即当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开在第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,且该第一角度落在0-45°,电子设备不打开任何应用,也不开启任何系统配置。When the user touches the empty icon 1203i in the icon display area 1203, in response to the user's operation, the electronic device can display the empty icon 1203i in a selected state, indicating that the electronic device sets the 0-45° interval to not correspond to any application. That is, when the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded form and the pause time at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, and the first angle falls within 0-45°, the electronic device does not open any application or open any application. Any system configuration.
如图8中的(B)所示,在0-45°设置界面1200上,响应于作用于系统配置控件1202的用户操作,例如触摸操作,电子设备显示系统配置控件1202对应的图标显示区,即图标显示区1204。图标显示区1204可包含静音模式图标1204a、护眼模式图标1204b、省电模式图标1204c、自动截屏图标1204d和空图标1204e。As shown in FIG. 8(B), on the 0-45° setting interface 1200, in response to user operations acting on the system configuration control 1202, such as a touch operation, the electronic device displays the icon display area corresponding to the system configuration control 1202, That is, the icon display area 1204. The icon display area 1204 may include a silent mode icon 1204a, an eye protection mode icon 1204b, a power saving mode icon 1204c, an automatic screenshot icon 1204d, and an empty icon 1204e.
本申请实施例中图7中的(C)和(D)、图8中的(A)以0-45°对应的应用设置过程为例进行介绍,45-90°、90-135°和135-179°类似。在设置完成各个角度区间对应的应用之后,如图8中的(C)所示,0-45°区间设置入口1102可不再显示提示1102a,而是显示提示1102b,用于提示“微博”。45-90°区间设置入口1103可不再显示提示1103a,而是显示提示1103b,用于提示“A游戏”。90-135°区间设置入口1104可不再显示提示1104a,而是显示提示1104b,用于提示“图库”。135-179°区间设置入口1105可不再显示提示1105a,而是显示提示1105b,用于提示“优兔”。电子设备可根据上述设置来存储表1所示映射关系。In the embodiments of this application, (C) and (D) in Figure 7 and (A) in Figure 8 take the application setting process corresponding to 0-45° as an example to introduce, 45-90°, 90-135° and 135° -179° is similar. After setting the application corresponding to each angle interval, as shown in (C) of FIG. 8, the 0-45° interval setting entry 1102 may no longer display the prompt 1102a, but display the prompt 1102b for prompting "Weibo". The 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 may no longer display the prompt 1103a, but display the prompt 1103b, which is used to prompt "A game". The 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 may no longer display the prompt 1104a, but display the prompt 1104b, which is used to prompt the "Gallery". The 135-179° interval setting entrance 1105 can no longer display the prompt 1105a, but display the prompt 1105b, which is used to prompt "Youtu". The electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 1 according to the above settings.
类似的,0-45°、45-90°、90-135°和135-179°对应的系统配置也可类比0-45°对应的应用设置过程。在设置完成各个角度区间对应的系统配置之后,如图8中的(D)所示,0-45°区间设置入口1102可显示提示1102c,用于提示“静音模式”。45-90°区间设置入口1103可显示提示1103c,用于提示“护眼模式”。90-135°区间设置入口1104可显示提示1104c,用于提示“省电模式”。135-179°区间设置入口1105可显示提示1105c,用于提示“自动截屏”。电子设备可根据上述设置存储表2所示映射关系。Similarly, the system configuration corresponding to 0-45°, 45-90°, 90-135° and 135-179° can also be compared to the application setting process corresponding to 0-45°. After the system configuration corresponding to each angle interval is set, as shown in (D) in FIG. 8, the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 can display a prompt 1102c for prompting "silent mode". The 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 can display prompt 1103c, which is used to prompt "eye protection mode". The 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 can display prompt 1104c, which is used to prompt "power saving mode". The 135-179° interval setting entrance 1105 can display the prompt 1105c, which is used to prompt "automatic screenshot". The electronic device can store the mapping relationship shown in Table 2 according to the above settings.
当用户在图标显示区1204中触摸空图标1204e,响应于该用户操作,电子设备可显示空图标1204e为选中状态,表示电子设备设定该0-45°区间不对应任何系统配置。即当电子设备检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开在第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,且该第一角度落在0-45°,电子设备不不开启任何系统配置。When the user touches the empty icon 1204e in the icon display area 1204, in response to the user's operation, the electronic device may display the empty icon 1204e in a selected state, indicating that the electronic device sets the 0-45° interval to not correspond to any system configuration. That is, when the electronic device detects that the time when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form at a first angle and pauses is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, and the first angle falls within 0-45°, the electronic device does not turn on any system configuration.
可以理解的,上述角度区间与应用(或者系统配置)的映射关系不限于在柔性显示屏折叠形态下进行设置,还可以是在全屏显示下进行设置的。另外上述以4个角度区间为例进行介绍,但是本申请实施例不限于4个,还可以其他数量的角度区间,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It is understandable that the above-mentioned mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application (or system configuration) is not limited to be set in the folded form of the flexible display screen, and may also be set in the full-screen display. In addition, the above description takes four angle intervals as an example, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited to four, and other number of angle intervals may also be used, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,电子设备可统计全屏显示场景下,应用的启动频率或者次数。然后电子设备获得使用频率或者次数最多的几个应用,并在柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开为展开形态时启动这些应用。In some other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may count the startup frequency or number of times of the application in a full-screen display scenario. Then, the electronic device obtains the most frequently used or frequently used applications, and starts these applications when the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form to the unfolded form.
示例性的,电子设备统计一段时间内,全屏显示时应用被启动的次数。例如,电子设备获取全屏显示时启动次数最多的四个应用,及各应用的启动次数。如表3所示,表3是一种全屏显示时应用启动次数统计示例。Exemplarily, the electronic device counts the number of times the application is launched during full-screen display within a period of time. For example, the electronic device obtains the four applications that have been launched the most frequently in full screen display, and the number of launches of each application. As shown in Table 3, Table 3 is an example of counting the number of application launches in full-screen display.
表3、一种全屏显示时应用启动次数统计示例Table 3. An example of counting the number of application launches in full-screen display
应用application | 启动次数operation counts |
微博 |
102102 |
A游戏A game | 8989 |
图库Gallery | 8080 |
B游戏B game | 7878 |
如表3所示,电子设备统计得到,全屏显示时启动次数最多的四个应用,及各应用的启动次数:微博102次,A游戏89次,图库80次,B游戏78次。As shown in Table 3, the statistics of electronic devices show that the four applications with the largest number of launches in full-screen display, and the number of launches of each application: 102 times on Weibo, 89 times for A games, 80 times for gallery, and 78 times for B games.
电子设备可存储这四个应用的标识:微博、A游戏、图库和B游戏。在检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开到打开角度为设定角度(例如20°)时,电子设备可后台运行这四个应用的标识对应的应用。The electronic device can store the logos of these four applications: Weibo, A game, gallery, and B game. When it is detected that the flexible display screen is expanded from a folded form to an opening angle of a set angle (for example, 20°), the electronic device may run applications corresponding to the four application identifiers in the background.
可选的,电子设备在后台运行这四个应用之后,可显示提示,以提示已后台运行这四个应用。关于提示可类比图3所描述示例中的提示界面40、图5所描述示例中的系统配置提示界面60和图6所描述示例中的下拉菜单70或上拉菜单80,这里不再赘述。Optionally, after the electronic device runs the four applications in the background, a prompt may be displayed to prompt that the four applications have been running in the background. The prompt can be compared to the prompt interface 40 in the example described in FIG. 3, the system configuration prompt interface 60 in the example described in FIG. 5, and the drop-down menu 70 or the pull-up menu 80 in the example described in FIG. 6, and will not be repeated here.
上述获取应用对应的启动次数的举例仅用于解释本申请实施例,不应构成限定,电子设备还可以获取启动次数更多或者更少的应用,本申请实施例对此不作限定。另外,也不限于对启动频率和启动次数进行统计,还可以是其他参数的统计,例如全屏显示时应用的前台运行时长统计等,然后根据统计结果确定后台启动的应用。The foregoing example of obtaining the number of activations corresponding to the application is only used to explain the embodiments of the present application, and should not constitute a limitation. The electronic device may also obtain applications with more or fewer activations, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. In addition, it is not limited to the statistics of the startup frequency and the number of startups, but also the statistics of other parameters, such as the statistics of the foreground running time of the application when the full-screen display is displayed, and then the background startup application is determined according to the statistical result.
根据用户在全屏显示时所使用应用的统计结果来确定后台运行的应用,更加符合用户个人的使用习惯,从而提高后台运行应用的被用户在全屏显示时使用的概率,减少了用户手动启动应用所耗费的时间,从而可为用户提供便利性。According to the statistical results of the applications used by the user in the full-screen display, determine the applications running in the background, which is more in line with the user's personal usage habits, thereby increasing the probability of the applications running in the background being used by the user in the full-screen display, and reducing the user's manual start of the application. Time-consuming, which can provide convenience for users.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电子设备可根据上述在全屏显示状态下的应用启动次数统计,显示图7中的(D)所示出的图标显示区1203中应用图标。应用启动次数越多的应用,在图标显示区1203越靠前显示。In some embodiments of the present application, the electronic device can display the application icons in the icon display area 1203 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 according to the above-mentioned statistics of the number of application startups in the full-screen display state. The applications with more application launches are displayed in the front of the icon display area 1203.
在本申请的一些实施例中,角度区间设置入口中的角度区间可以是响应于用户操作设定的。具体的,请参阅图9,图9是本申请实施例提供的一种应用界面的示意图。如图9中的(A)所示,折叠屏角度控制界面1100还可包括添加角度控件1106、删除角度控件1107和开关1108。如图9所示,每个角度区间设置入口还可以包含角度调节条,用于供用户调节角度区间。具体的,0-45°区间设置入口1102包含角度调节条1102d,45-90°区间设置入口1103包含角度调节条1103d,90-135°区间设置入口1104包含角度调节条1104d,135-179°区间设置入口1105包含角度调节条1105d。In some embodiments of the present application, the angle interval in the angle interval setting entry may be set in response to a user operation. Specifically, please refer to FIG. 9, which is a schematic diagram of an application interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) in FIG. 9, the folding screen angle control interface 1100 may further include an add angle control 1106, a delete angle control 1107, and a switch 1108. As shown in Fig. 9, each angle section setting entry may also include an angle adjustment bar for the user to adjust the angle section. Specifically, the 0-45° interval setting entrance 1102 includes an angle adjustment bar 1102d, the 45-90° interval setting entrance 1103 includes an angle adjustment bar 1103d, and the 90-135° interval setting entrance 1104 includes an angle adjustment bar 1104d, and the 135-179° interval. The installation entrance 1105 includes an angle adjustment bar 1105d.
下面以0-45°区间为例介绍角度区间的调节过程。角度调节条1102d可包含调节点1102d-1和调节点1102d-2。如图9中的(A)所示,响应于用户对调节点1102d-1的拖动操作,电子设备可调节0-45°角度区间的下限0°。示例性的,响应于用户对调节点1102d-1的拖动操作,电子设备将0-45°角度区间的下限0°调节为15°,且更改“0-45°区间”显示为“15-45°区间”。类似的,调节点1102d-2也可以响应于用户的操作,使得电子设备调节该角度区间对应的上限45°。The following takes the 0-45° interval as an example to introduce the adjustment process of the angle interval. The angle adjustment bar 1102d may include an adjustment point 1102d-1 and an adjustment point 1102d-2. As shown in (A) in FIG. 9, in response to the user's drag operation on the adjustment point 1102d-1, the electronic device can adjust the lower limit 0° of the 0-45° angular interval. Exemplarily, in response to the user's drag operation on the adjustment point 1102d-1, the electronic device adjusts the lower limit 0° of the 0-45° angle interval to 15°, and changes the display of the “0-45° interval” to “15- 45° interval". Similarly, the adjustment point 1102d-2 can also respond to a user's operation, so that the electronic device adjusts the upper limit of the angle interval corresponding to 45°.
角度调节条1103d、角度调节条1104d和角度调节条1105d可类似比上述角度调节条1102d的描述。The angle adjustment bar 1103d, the angle adjustment bar 1104d, and the angle adjustment bar 1105d can be similar to the description of the above angle adjustment bar 1102d.
本申请实施例中,多个角度区间之间可被电子设备设定不能被重叠设置。例如,当经过上述过程设定完成15-45°角度区间之后,其他的角度区间的在45-180°范围可调节。In the embodiment of the present application, multiple angle intervals can be set by the electronic device and cannot be overlapped. For example, after the 15-45° angle interval is set through the above process, the other angle intervals can be adjusted in the range of 45-180°.
可以理解的,本申请实施例以角度调节条为例进行说明,但是本申请实施例对于用于调节角度区间的控件的具体设计不作限定,还可以有其他的设计。It is understandable that the embodiment of the present application takes the angle adjustment bar as an example for description, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific design of the control for adjusting the angle interval, and other designs are also possible.
添加角度控件1106,用于增加一个或多个角度区间。响应于作用在添加角度控件1106的用户操作,电子设备可显示用于增加角度区间的用户界面。An angle control 1106 is added for adding one or more angle intervals. In response to the user's operation on adding the angle control 1106, the electronic device may display a user interface for increasing the angle interval.
删除角度控件1107,用于删除已添加的角度区间,已添加的角度区间可包含0-45°、45-90°、90-135°和135-179°。The delete angle control 1107 is used to delete the added angle interval. The added angle interval can include 0-45°, 45-90°, 90-135°, and 135-179°.
本申请实施例中,第一开关可包含开关1101,第二开关可包含开关1108。本申请实施例中,折叠屏角度控制界面1100可包含第一开关和第二开关,也可以仅包含第一开关,还可以仅包含第二开关,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the first switch may include a switch 1101, and the second switch may include a switch 1108. In the embodiment of the present application, the folding screen angle control interface 1100 may include a first switch and a second switch, may also include only the first switch, or may only include the second switch, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,电子设备可响应于用户的操作,关闭上述前台启动应用且关闭后台启动应用的功能。开关1108可用于关闭前台启动应用且关闭后台启动应用的功能。具体的,如图9中的(A)和(B)所示,当折叠屏角度控制开关1101为打开状态时,开关1108处于无效(disabled)状态。响应于作用在折叠屏角度控制开关1101的用户操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可将折叠屏角度控制开关1101显示为关闭状态,并关闭前台启动应用、调整系统配置的功能。如图9中的(B)所示,响应于作用在折叠屏角度控制开关1101的用户操作(例如触摸操作),电子设备可不再显示各个角度区间的设置入口,折叠屏角度控制界面1100还可以包含提示1109,以提示“关闭后,在某一角度停顿,不执行任何操作”。In some other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device may, in response to a user's operation, close the above-mentioned foreground startup application and close the background startup application function. The switch 1108 can be used to turn off the function of starting applications in the foreground and turning off the functions of starting applications in the background. Specifically, as shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 9, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state, the switch 1108 is in the disabled state. In response to a user operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the folding screen angle control switch 1101, the electronic device can display the folding screen angle control switch 1101 as a closed state, and close the foreground function of starting applications and adjusting system configuration. As shown in FIG. 9(B), in response to a user operation (such as a touch operation) acting on the angle control switch 1101 of the folding screen, the electronic device may no longer display the setting entry of each angle interval, and the angle control interface 1100 of the folding screen may also Contains prompt 1109 to prompt "After closing, stop at a certain angle and do nothing."
当折叠屏角度控制开关1101为关闭状态时,开关1108由无效(disabled)状态变为有效状态。当开关1108处于有效状态时,电子设备可响应于用户作用在开关1108的触摸操作,将开关1108打开或关闭。当开关1108被关闭时,柔性显示屏的打开角度在某一角度停顿,电子设备不执行任何操作。当开关1108被打开时,柔性显示屏的打开角度在某一角度停顿,可触发电子设备后台运行全屏显示时启动次数最多的应用。When the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the switch 1108 changes from the disabled state to the effective state. When the switch 1108 is in the active state, the electronic device can turn the switch 1108 on or off in response to the user's touch operation on the switch 1108. When the switch 1108 is closed, the opening angle of the flexible display screen stops at a certain angle, and the electronic device does not perform any operation. When the switch 1108 is turned on, the opening angle of the flexible display screen is stopped at a certain angle, which can trigger the electronic device to run in the background of the full-screen display application that has been launched the most times.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开到打开角度为设定角度(例如20°)时,电子设备可检测折叠屏角度控制界面1100中折叠屏角度控制开关1101是否处于打开状态。当折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于打开状态时,电子设备在检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度保持在第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值时,可根据所设置各角度区间对应的应用或者系统配置启动应用或者调整系统配置。当折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于关闭状态时,电子设备可在检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度为设定角度时即后台运行统计得到的应用。以下具体进行介绍,请参阅图10,图10是本申请实施例提供的一种折叠屏设备的应用启动方法的流程示意图。该应用打开方法可包含步骤S101~S106。In some embodiments of the present application, when it is detected that the flexible display screen is expanded from a folded form to an opening angle of a set angle (for example, 20°), the electronic device can detect the folding screen angle control switch 1101 in the folding screen angle control interface 1100 Whether it is in the open state. When the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the electronic device may set the corresponding application or The system configuration starts the application or adjusts the system configuration. When the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the electronic device can run the statistical application in the background when detecting that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the set angle. For specific introduction below, please refer to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application of a folding screen device according to an embodiment of the present application. The application opening method may include steps S101 to S106.
S101、电子设备的柔性显示屏为折叠形态。S101. The flexible display screen of the electronic device is in a folded form.
S102、当检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开到打开角度为设定角度时,电子设备检测折叠屏角度控制界面1100中折叠屏角度控制开关1101是否处于打开状态。S102. When it is detected that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded form to the opening angle as the set angle, the electronic device detects whether the folding screen angle control switch 1101 in the folding screen angle control interface 1100 is in the open state.
示例性的,设定角度可以是20°。当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度由0~20°之间的一个角度展开到20°时,电子设备可检测折叠屏角度控制开关1101是否处于打开状态。Exemplarily, the setting angle may be 20°. When detecting that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is expanded from an angle between 0° and 20° to 20°, the electronic device can detect whether the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state.
S103、当折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于打开状态时,电子设备在检测到柔性显示屏的 打开角度保持在第一角度的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值时,根据角度区间对应的应用或者系统配置启动应用或者调整系统配置。S103. When the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen remains at the first angle for a time greater than or equal to the first time threshold, according to the application or system configuration corresponding to the angle interval Start the application or adjust the system configuration.
其中,电子设备根据角度区间对应的应用启动应用的过程可参考图2和图3的描述,根据角度区间对应的系统配置调整系统配置的过程可参考图5的描述。For the process of the electronic device starting the application according to the application corresponding to the angle interval, refer to the description of FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, and the process of adjusting the system configuration according to the system configuration corresponding to the angle interval may refer to the description of FIG. 5.
本申请实施例中,当检测到第一角度落在两个角度区间的边界点时,电子设备可将第一角度减小1°,并检测减小后的角度所落在的角度区间对应的应用或者系统配置。In the embodiment of the present application, when it is detected that the first angle falls at the boundary point of the two angle intervals, the electronic device may reduce the first angle by 1°, and detect the corresponding angle interval in which the reduced angle falls Application or system configuration.
例如,135°是90°~135°和135°~179°的边界点。当检测到第一角度为135°时,电子设备可将135°减小1°,并获取134°所落在的角度区间90°~135°对应的应用或者系统配置。For example, 135° is the boundary point between 90° to 135° and 135° to 179°. When it is detected that the first angle is 135°, the electronic device may reduce 135° by 1°, and obtain the application or system configuration corresponding to the angular interval of 90°-135° in which 134° falls.
本申请实施例中,不限于将落在边界点的角度减1°,还可以是加1°,还可以是增减其他的数值,本申请实施例对此不做任何限制。In the embodiments of the present application, it is not limited to subtracting 1° from the angle falling on the boundary point, but may also be increased by 1°, or other values may be increased or decreased. The embodiments of the present application do not impose any limitation on this.
S104、当折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于关闭状态时,电子设备可在检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度为设定角度时即后台运行统计得到的应用。S104. When the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the electronic device can run the statistical application in the background when detecting that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is the set angle.
其中,统计得到的应用具体可参考表3所描述示例。Among them, the specific application obtained by statistics can refer to the example described in Table 3.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于关闭状态时,电子设备可根据运行内存的占用情况和应用在全屏显示时启动次数统计来确定后台运行哪些应用。运行内存被占用的越多,后台运行的应用数量越少。确定后台运行的应用的数量S(整数)之后,电子设备可根据表3选取全屏显示时启动次数最多的S个应用。In some embodiments of the present application, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the off state, the electronic device can determine which applications are running in the background according to the running memory occupancy and the statistics of the number of times the application is started when the application is displayed in full screen. The more the running memory is occupied, the fewer apps are running in the background. After determining the number S (integer) of applications running in the background, the electronic device can select the S applications that have been launched the most times during full-screen display according to Table 3.
例如,折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于关闭状态,电子设备可在检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度为20°时,检测到运行内存剩余80%,则电子设备可后台运行全屏显示时启动次数最多的4个应用。即电子设备根据表3后台启动微博、A游戏、图库和B游戏。当电子设备检测到运行内存剩余50%时,电子设备可后台运行全屏显示时启动次数最多的3个应用。即电子设备根据表3后台启动微博、A游戏和图库。For example, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, when the electronic device detects that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is 20°, it detects that 80% of the running memory is left, and the electronic device can run in the background with the largest number of startups when the full screen is displayed. 4 applications. That is, the electronic device starts Weibo, A game, gallery and B game in the background according to Table 3. When the electronic device detects that 50% of the running memory remains, the electronic device can run the 3 applications that have been launched the most in full-screen display in the background. That is, the electronic device starts Weibo, A game and gallery in the background according to Table 3.
S105、电子设备的柔性显示屏为展开形态。S105. The flexible display screen of the electronic device is in an expanded form.
S106、电子设备统计展开形态下启动的应用,并根据统计结果更新应用启动次数统计表。S106. The electronic device counts the applications started in the expanded state, and updates the statistics table of the number of times the applications are started according to the statistical results.
电子设备可在某一个应用被启动时,更新应用启动次数统计表中的启动次数。其中,应用被启动可以是响应于作用于应用图标的触摸操作启动的,还可以在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之前,通过图2和图3所描述示例启动的。例如,在柔性显示屏展开到展开形态之前,电子设备统计得到的应用启动次数统计如表3所示,经过图2所描述示例柔性显示屏为展开形态时,电子设备可更新图库的启动次数为81次。The electronic device may update the number of activations in the application activation count table when a certain application is activated. Wherein, the application may be started in response to a touch operation acting on the application icon, or it may be started through the examples described in FIGS. 2 and 3 before the flexible display screen is expanded to the expanded form. For example, before the flexible display screen is unfolded to the unfolded form, the statistics of the number of application launches obtained by the electronic device are shown in Table 3. When the example flexible display screen described in Figure 2 is in the unfolded form, the number of launches that the electronic device can update the gallery is 81 times.
在本申请的一些实施例中,电子设备可在柔性显示屏展开到一定角度时给出提示。例如,图2~图6所描述示例中,当柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中打开角度达到45°、90°和135°时,电子设备可产生振动提示,以提醒用户当前的打开角度。在另一种可能的实现方式中,电子设备的弯折部位的位置上可设置机械构件。当柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中打开角度达到45°、90°和135°时,该机械构件可使得电子设备产生振动提示,以提醒用户当前的打开角度。In some embodiments of the present application, the electronic device can give a prompt when the flexible display screen is unfolded to a certain angle. For example, in the examples described in FIGS. 2-6, when the opening angle of the flexible display screen reaches 45°, 90°, and 135° during the unfolding process, the electronic device may generate a vibration prompt to remind the user of the current opening angle. In another possible implementation manner, a mechanical component may be provided at the position of the bending part of the electronic device. When the opening angle of the flexible display screen reaches 45°, 90°, and 135° during the unfolding process from the folded state, the mechanical component can cause the electronic device to generate a vibration prompt to remind the user of the current opening angle.
下面首先介绍本申请实施例提供的示例性电子设备100。The following first introduces an exemplary electronic device 100 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图11示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the electronic device 100.
电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2. , Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Among them, the different processing units may be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100. The controller can generate operation control signals according to the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 to store instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory can store instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or used cyclically. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided, the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces can include integrated circuit (I2C) interfaces, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interfaces, pulse code modulation (PCM) interfaces, universal asynchronous transmitters receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, which includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193, etc., respectively through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through an I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100.
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处 理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through an I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a two-way communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160. For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through a UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the display screen 194, the camera 193 and other peripheral devices. The MIPI interface includes a camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), a display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), and so on. In some embodiments, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100. The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through a DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100.
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and so on. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and specifically may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and so on. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect earphones and play audio through earphones. This interface can also be used to connect to other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is merely a schematic description, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100. In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection modes in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection modes.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130. In some embodiments of wireless charging, the charging management module 140 may receive the wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块 141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charge management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the external memory, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110. In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。The antenna 1 and the antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in the electronic device 100 can be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna can be used in combination with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G/3G/4G/5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100. The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves by the antenna 1, and perform processing such as filtering, amplifying and transmitting the received electromagnetic waves to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor, and convert it into electromagnetic wave radiation via the antenna 1. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through the display screen 194. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be an independent device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2, frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110. The wireless communication module 160 may also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, perform frequency modulation, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves to radiate through the antenna 2.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS), 准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is an image processing microprocessor, which is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. The processor 110 may include one or more GPUs, which execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can adopt liquid crystal display (LCD), organic light-emitting diode (OLED), active matrix organic light-emitting diode or active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode). AMOLED, flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
本申请实施例中,显示面板可采用OLED、AMOLED、FLED实现,使得显示屏194可以被弯折。本申请实施例中,将可以被弯折的显示屏称为可折叠显示屏。其中,该可折叠显示屏可以是一块屏幕,也可以是多块屏幕拼凑在一起组合成的显示屏,在此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the display panel can be implemented by OLED, AMOLED, or FLED, so that the display screen 194 can be bent. In the embodiments of the present application, the display screen that can be bent is referred to as a foldable display screen. Wherein, the foldable display screen may be one screen, or a display screen formed by patching together multiple screens, which is not limited here.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing and is converted into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also optimize the image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。The camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos. The object generates an optical image through the lens and is projected to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transfers the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include one or N cameras 193, and N is a positive integer greater than one.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, for example, the transfer mode between human brain neurons, it can quickly process input information, and it can also continuously self-learn. Through the NPU, applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, text understanding, and so on.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备 100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, where the executable program code includes instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by running instructions stored in the internal memory 121. The internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. Among them, the storage program area can store an operating system, at least one application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required by at least one function. The data storage area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into an analog audio signal for output, and is also used to convert an analog audio input into a digital audio signal. The audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110, or part of the functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110.
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。The speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。The receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or voice message, it can receive the voice by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone", "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through the human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which can implement noise reduction functions in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used to connect wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, and a cellular telecommunications industry association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA, CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的 触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194. There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors and so on. The capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations that act on the same touch position but have different touch operation strengths may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) can be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shake angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
本申请实施例中,电子设备100还可以通过加速度传感器180E和陀螺仪传感器180B,检测可折叠显示屏的弯折的夹角,即打开角度。电子设备100还可以根据该弯折的夹角,判断出该可折叠显示屏处于折叠形态还是处于展开形态。电子设备100还可以根据弯折的夹角检测柔性显示屏在第一角度保持的时间。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also detect the bending angle of the foldable display screen, that is, the opening angle, through the acceleration sensor 180E and the gyroscope sensor 180B. The electronic device 100 can also determine whether the foldable display screen is in the folded form or the unfolded form according to the angle of the bend. The electronic device 100 can also detect the time that the flexible display screen is held at the first angle according to the bent angle.
具体的,柔性显示屏的A屏所在的部分可包含一组传感器:至少一个加速度传感器180E和至少一个陀螺仪传感器180B。B屏所在的部分也可包含一组传感器:至少一个加速度传感器180E和至少一个陀螺仪传感器180B。通过这两组传感器,电子设备可确定加速度传感器三轴数据(单位为m/s2,采样频率为100Hz)、零偏修正后的陀螺仪传感器三轴数据(单位为rad/s,采样频率为100Hz)。然后,电子设备可通过滤波算法从加速度传感器三轴数据中提取加速度传感器数值(单位为m/s2,采样频率为100Hz)、数据对应的系统时间,利用这些参数通过进一步融合算法计算,可获得折叠屏两个屏幕的相对角度。Specifically, the part where the A screen of the flexible display screen is located may include a group of sensors: at least one acceleration sensor 180E and at least one gyroscope sensor 180B. The part where the screen B is located may also include a group of sensors: at least one acceleration sensor 180E and at least one gyroscope sensor 180B. Through these two sets of sensors, the electronic device can determine the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor (unit is m/s2, the sampling frequency is 100Hz), and the three-axis data of the gyroscope sensor after zero offset correction (the unit is rad/s, the sampling frequency is 100Hz) ). Then, the electronic device can extract the acceleration sensor value (unit is m/s2, sampling frequency is 100Hz) and the system time corresponding to the data from the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor through the filtering algorithm, and use these parameters to calculate by further fusion algorithm to obtain the folding The relative angle of the two screens.
在另一些实施例中,该电子设备100还可以包括角度传感器(图11中未示出)该角度传感器可以设置在该可折叠显示屏的弯折部位处。电子设备100可以通过设置在该可折叠显示屏的弯折部位的角度传感器,测量该可折叠显示屏中间弯折部位两端所成夹角。In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may further include an angle sensor (not shown in FIG. 11), and the angle sensor may be arranged at a bending position of the foldable display screen. The electronic device 100 can measure the angle formed by the two ends of the middle bending part of the foldable display screen through an angle sensor disposed at the bending part of the foldable display screen.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the holster or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and apply to applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers and so on.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F, used to measure distance. The electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用 于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。The proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light to the outside through the light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 can determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, and the pocket mode will automatically unlock and lock the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of the ambient light. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access application locks, fingerprint photographs, fingerprint answering calls, and so on.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch screen is composed of the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194, which is also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect touch operations acting on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. The visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the position of the display screen 194.
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can obtain the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure pulse signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can parse the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The button 190 includes a power-on button, a volume button, and so on. The button 190 may be a mechanical button. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key input, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration notification, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations that act on different applications (such as photographing, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Acting on touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (for example: time reminding, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate the charging status, power change, or to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and so on.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以 不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect to the SIM card. The SIM card can be inserted into the SIM card interface 195 or pulled out from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, and N is a positive integer greater than 1. The SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc. The same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of the multiple cards can be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 may also be compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as call and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。In the embodiment of the present application, the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of the present application takes an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 by way of example.
参见图12,图12示出了本申请实施例示例性提供的电子设备100的软件结构框图。该电子设备100在柔性显示屏从折叠形态展开为展开形态过程中可根据所停顿的第一角度启动应用或者调整系统配置。Referring to FIG. 12, FIG. 12 shows a software structure block diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application. The electronic device 100 can start an application or adjust the system configuration according to the stopped first angle during the process of the flexible display screen being unfolded from the folded form to the unfolded form.
如图12所示,该电子设备的软件系统可包括:应用程序层、应用程序接口(application programming interface,API)、系统库及内核层(kernel)。其中:As shown in FIG. 12, the software system of the electronic device may include: an application layer, an application programming interface (application programming interface, API), a system library, and a kernel layer (kernel). among them:
内核层是硬件层和软件层之间的层。硬件层可至少包含A屏部分的加速度传感器和陀螺仪传感器,B屏部分的加速度传感器和陀螺仪传感器,分别用于获取两部分的传感器数据。The kernel layer is the layer between the hardware layer and the software layer. The hardware layer may include at least the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor of the A screen part, and the acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor of the B screen part, which are used to obtain the sensor data of the two parts respectively.
内核层可包含传感器驱动,当加速度传感器180E和陀螺仪传感器180E检测到传感器数据,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将传感器数据发送给系统库中的传感器(sensor)管理器。The kernel layer may include sensor drivers. When the acceleration sensor 180E and the gyroscope sensor 180E detect sensor data, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer sends sensor data to the sensor manager in the system library.
不限于传感器驱动,内核层还可包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动等等。Not limited to sensor drivers, the kernel layer can also include display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and so on.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如包含传感器管理器,用于获取A屏所在部分的三轴数据和B屏所在部分的三轴数据,并计算柔性显示屏的打开角度。传感器管理器可包含A屏部分三轴数据获取单元、B屏部分三轴数据获取单元和角度计算单元。其中:The system library can include multiple functional modules. For example, it includes a sensor manager, which is used to obtain the three-axis data of the part where the A screen is located and the three-axis data of the part where the B screen is located, and calculate the opening angle of the flexible display screen. The sensor manager may include a three-axis data acquisition unit for the A screen part, a three-axis data acquisition unit for the B screen part and an angle calculation unit. among them:
A屏部分三轴数据获取单元可用于从传感器驱动获取A屏所在部分的加速度传感器三轴数据(单位为m/s2,采样频率为100Hz)和零偏修正后的陀螺仪传感器三轴数据。The three-axis data acquisition unit of the A screen part can be used to obtain the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor of the part where the A screen is located (the unit is m/s2, the sampling frequency is 100Hz) and the three-axis data of the gyro sensor after zero offset correction.
B屏部分三轴数据获取单元可用于从传感器驱动获取B屏所在部分的加速度传感器三轴数据和零偏修正后的陀螺仪传感器三轴数据。The three-axis data acquisition unit of the B screen part can be used to obtain the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor and the three-axis data of the gyro sensor after the zero offset correction from the sensor driver.
角度计算单元可根据A屏所在部分的三轴数据和B屏所在部分的三轴数据,计算柔性显示屏的打开角度,并将柔性显示屏的打开角度传输到应用程序框架层。具体的,角度计算单元可通过滤波算法从加速度传感器三轴数据中提取加速度传感器数值、数据对应的系统时间,利用这些参数通过进一步融合算法计算,可获得柔性显示屏中A屏和B屏两个屏幕的相对角度,即打开角度。The angle calculation unit can calculate the opening angle of the flexible display according to the three-axis data of the part where the A screen is located and the three-axis data of the part where the B screen is located, and transmit the opening angle of the flexible display to the application framework layer. Specifically, the angle calculation unit can extract the acceleration sensor value and the system time corresponding to the data from the three-axis data of the acceleration sensor through a filtering algorithm, and use these parameters to calculate through further fusion algorithms to obtain two screens A and B in the flexible display screen. The relative angle of the screen, that is, the opening angle.
具体的,角度计算单元,可周期性的计算打开角度并上报打开角度。Specifically, the angle calculation unit may periodically calculate the opening angle and report the opening angle.
不限于传感器管理器,系统库还可以包含表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。Not limited to the sensor manager, the system library may also include a surface manager, a media library, a three-dimensional graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), a 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL), and so on.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图12所示,应用程序框架层可以包括角度检测启动应用服务、活动管理服务(activity manager service,AMS)和系统配置调整服务。As shown in FIG. 12, the application framework layer may include angle detection start application service, activity management service (activity manager service, AMS), and system configuration adjustment service.
角度检测启动应用服务,可包含角度区间检测单元,应用或系统配置匹配单元和触发单元。Angle detection starts the application service, which can include angle interval detection unit, application or system configuration matching unit and trigger unit.
角度区间检测单元可接收来自角度计算单元的角度数据,该角度数据例如是0~180°。当检测到柔性显示屏的打开角度逐渐变大,角度区间检测单元即确定柔性显示屏由折叠形态逐渐展开。当检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态逐渐展开过程中打开角度在第一角度保持的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值,角度计算单元可确定柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程在第一角度停顿。角度区间检测单元还可检测柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程停顿的第一角度所在的角度区间。该角度区间可以是表1或表2所示的角度区间中的一个。The angle interval detection unit may receive angle data from the angle calculation unit, and the angle data is, for example, 0-180°. When it is detected that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is gradually increasing, the angle interval detection unit determines that the flexible display screen is gradually unfolded from the folded form. When it is detected that the time that the opening angle of the flexible display screen is gradually expanded from the folded configuration at the first angle is greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the angle calculation unit may determine that the flexible display screen expands from the folded configuration to a stop at the first angle. The angle interval detection unit can also detect the angle interval at which the flexible display screen stops at the first angle during the unfolding process of the folded configuration. The angle interval may be one of the angle intervals shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
应用和系统配置匹配单元,可根据角度区间与应用之间的映射关系确定需要启动的应用或需要调整的系统配置,并通知给触发单元。该映射关系可以是表1或表2所示出的映射关系。The application and system configuration matching unit can determine the application to be started or the system configuration to be adjusted according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application, and notify the trigger unit. The mapping relationship may be the mapping relationship shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
具体的,应用和系统配置匹配单元可根据存储的角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,确定角度区间对应的应用。角度区间与应用之间的映射关系参考表1所描述示例。Specifically, the application and system configuration matching unit may determine the application corresponding to the angle interval according to the stored mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application. Refer to the example described in Table 1 for the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
在一些实施例中,在确定柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程停顿的第一角度之后,应用和系统配置匹配单元可根据存储的角度区间与系统配置之间的映射关系,确定第一角度所在的角度区间,并确定对应的系统配置。角度区间与系统配置之间的映射关系参考表2所描述示例。In some embodiments, after determining the first angle at which the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form, the application and system configuration matching unit may determine the first angle according to the stored mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration. Angle interval, and determine the corresponding system configuration. Refer to the example described in Table 2 for the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration.
在一些实施例中,在应用程序层中折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于打开状态时,角度区间检测单元可根据表1和表2确定需要启动的应用或者需要调整的系统配置。柔性显示屏由折叠形态展开过程中,折叠屏角度控制开关1101处于关闭状态时,角度区间检测单元可在检测到打开角度为设定角度(例如20°)时,后台运行统计得到的一个或多个应用。统计得到的这一个或多个应用可参考表3所示示例。In some embodiments, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the open state in the application layer, the angle interval detection unit may determine the application to be started or the system configuration to be adjusted according to Table 1 and Table 2. When the flexible display screen is unfolded from the folded form, when the folding screen angle control switch 1101 is in the closed state, the angle interval detection unit can detect that the opening angle is a set angle (for example, 20°), and run one or more statistics obtained in the background. Applications. For the one or more applications obtained by statistics, please refer to the examples shown in Table 3.
触发单元,可根据来自应用和系统配置匹配单元的通知,指令AMS启动第一应用,还可根据角度区间与系统配置之间的映射关系指令系统配置调整服务调整系统配置。第一应用示例性的可参考图2所示的图库应用。调整系统配置示例性的可参考图5所描述示例。The trigger unit can instruct the AMS to start the first application according to the notification from the application and system configuration matching unit, and can also instruct the system configuration adjustment service to adjust the system configuration according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the system configuration. As an example of the first application, reference may be made to the gallery application shown in FIG. 2. For an exemplary adjustment system configuration, refer to the example described in FIG. 5.
在一些实施例中,在检测到柔性显示屏由折叠形态逐渐展开过程中,角度区间检测单元先后检测到两个不同的停顿角度,可将该两个不同的停顿角度均发送给应用和系统配置单元。应用和系统配置单元可根据这两个不同的停顿角度匹配到两个不同的应用,并先后通知给AMS,AMS在接收到指令后,启动这两个应用,并将在后的停顿角度对应的应用前台运行,在前的停顿角度对应的应用后台运行。在另一种可能的实现方式中,AMS将这两个应用均前台运行,例如指示分屏显示两个应用的应用界面。In some embodiments, in the process of detecting that the flexible display screen is gradually unfolding from the folded form, the angle interval detection unit successively detects two different pause angles, and may send the two different pause angles to the application and system configuration. unit. The application and system configuration unit can match two different applications according to these two different pause angles, and notify AMS one after another. After receiving the instruction, AMS starts these two applications and sets the subsequent pause angles to the corresponding The application runs in the foreground, and runs in the background of the application corresponding to the previous pause angle. In another possible implementation manner, the AMS runs the two applications in the foreground, for example, instructs to display the application interfaces of the two applications on a split screen.
AMS可根据来自触发单元的指令,启动应用程序层中相应的应用。The AMS can start the corresponding application in the application layer according to the instruction from the trigger unit.
系统配置调整服务可根据来自触发单元的指令,对应用程序层中系统配置进行调整,例如调整为省电模式。The system configuration adjustment service can adjust the system configuration in the application layer according to the instruction from the trigger unit, for example, adjust to the power saving mode.
不限于角度检测启动应用服务,应用程序框架层还可以包含窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。Not limited to angle detection to start application services, the application framework layer can also include window managers, content providers, view systems, phone managers, resource managers, notification managers, etc.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。如图12所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。这些应 用程序包可被AMS启动。前台运行的应用以界面的形式呈现给用户,可参照图2、图3、和图4所描述实施例。后台运行的应用可以以提示界面的形式呈现给用户,可参照图3所描述实施例。应用程序层还可以呈现出调整后的系统配置,例如省电模式,调整显示屏亮度等。调整后的系统配置也可以提示界面的形式呈现给用户,可参考图5、图6所描述实施例。The application layer can include a series of application packages. As shown in Figure 12, the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, etc. These application packages can be launched by AMS. The applications running in the foreground are presented to the user in the form of an interface, and the embodiments described in FIG. 2, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4 may be referred to. The application running in the background may be presented to the user in the form of a prompt interface, and the embodiment described in FIG. 3 may be referred to. The application layer can also present the adjusted system configuration, such as power saving mode, adjusting the brightness of the display screen and so on. The adjusted system configuration may also be presented to the user in the form of a prompt interface, and the embodiments described in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 may be referred to.
需要说明的,图12所示的电子设备的功能架构仅仅是本申请实施例的一种实现方式,实际应用中,电子设备还可以包括更多或更少的软件模块,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the functional architecture of the electronic device shown in FIG. 12 is only an implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application. In practical applications, the electronic device may also include more or fewer software modules, which is not limited here.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备在如图12所示的软件结构的基础上,还可以包括显示模块,该显示模块用于根据各个软件模块的运行而显示对应的用户界面。该显示模块显示的用户界面可参照如图2~图9实施例。该显示模块具体可以实现为图11中的显示屏194。In the embodiment of the present application, on the basis of the software structure shown in FIG. 12, the electronic device may further include a display module, and the display module is configured to display a corresponding user interface according to the operation of each software module. For the user interface displayed by the display module, refer to the embodiments shown in Figs. 2-9. The display module can be specifically implemented as the display screen 194 in FIG. 11.
基于图12所示的软件架构图,下面以一个具体的例子说明本申请实施例提供的折叠屏设备中应用打开方法。图13示出了本申请实施例提供的根据柔性显示屏打开角度启动应用的方法流程示意图。该打开应用的方法所涉及的应用界面可参考图2~图6。Based on the software architecture diagram shown in FIG. 12, the following uses a specific example to describe the application opening method in the folding screen device provided in the embodiment of the present application. FIG. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for starting an application according to an opening angle of a flexible display screen provided by an embodiment of the present application. For the application interface involved in the method of opening an application, refer to Figs. 2-6.
图13中步骤S201~S212的实现可参照图12的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For the implementation of steps S201 to S212 in FIG. 13, reference may be made to the related description in FIG. 12, which will not be repeated here.
上述实施例中所用,根据上下文,术语“当…时”可以被解释为意思是“如果…”或“在…后”或“响应于确定…”或“响应于检测到…”。类似地,根据上下文,短语“在确定…时”或“如果检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释为意思是“如果确定…”或“响应于确定…”或“在检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测到(所陈述的条件或事件)”。As used in the above embodiments, depending on the context, the term "when" can be interpreted as meaning "if..." or "after" or "in response to determining..." or "in response to detecting...". Similarly, depending on the context, the phrase "when determining..." or "if detected (statement or event)" can be interpreted as meaning "if determined..." or "in response to determining..." or "when detected (Condition or event stated)" or "in response to detection of (condition or event stated)".
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘)等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium, (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state hard disk).
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。A person of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the process in the above-mentioned embodiment method can be realized. The process can be completed by a computer program instructing relevant hardware. The program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. , May include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage media include: ROM or random storage RAM, magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes.
Claims (27)
- 一种应用打开方法,所述方法应用于包含有柔性显示屏的电子设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application opening method, which is applied to an electronic device including a flexible display screen, characterized in that the method includes:所述电子设备的所述柔性显示屏处于折叠形态;The flexible display screen of the electronic device is in a folded form;所述电子设备检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值;The electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded from the folded configuration to a first angle; and the time during which the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold;所述电子设备启动第一应用或者,所述电子设备开启第一能力。The electronic device starts the first application or the electronic device starts the first capability.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备启动第一应用,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein starting the first application by the electronic device comprises:所述电子设备启动第一应用,并将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。The electronic device starts the first application, and displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen or partially.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备启动第一应用之后所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein after the electronic device starts the first application, the method further comprises:当检测到所述柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,所述电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。When detecting that the flexible display screen is in an expanded form, the electronic device displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen or partially.
- 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备启动第一应用之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein after the electronic device starts the first application, the method further comprises:所述电子设备检测所述柔性显示屏展开第二角度,并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第二角度停顿的时间大于或等于第二时间阈值;其中,所述第二角度大于所述第一角度,所述第二时间阈值与所述第一时间阈值相同或不同;The electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded at a second angle, and the time during which the flexible display screen is stopped at the second angle is greater than or equal to a second time threshold; wherein the second angle is greater than the first angle. Angle, the second time threshold is the same or different from the first time threshold;所述电子设备启动第二应用,所述第二应用不同于所述第一应用,或者启动第二能力,所述第二能力不同于所述第一能力。The electronic device starts a second application, which is different from the first application, or starts a second capability, which is different from the first capability.
- 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备启动第二应用之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein after the electronic device starts the second application, the method further comprises:所述电子设备将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行;或者The electronic device displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen, and runs the first application in the background; or所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏。The electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
- 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein after the electronic device displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen and runs the first application in the background, the method Also includes:所述电子设备显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示所述第一应用已后台运行。The electronic device displays first prompt information, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the first application is running in the background.
- 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏,包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the electronic device displaying part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen comprises:所述电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上分屏显示;或者The electronic device displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen in separate screens; or所述电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上层叠显示。The electronic device stacks and displays the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen.
- 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值之后,所述电子设备启动第一应用之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the electronic device detects that the flexible display screen is expanded to a first angle from the folded configuration; and the flexible display screen is in the first angle. After the angle pause time is greater than or equal to the first time threshold and before the electronic device starts the first application, the method further includes:所述电子设备确定所述第一角度对应的第一角度区间;Determining, by the electronic device, a first angle interval corresponding to the first angle;所述电子设备根据角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,确定所述第一角度区间对应的所述第一应用。The electronic device determines the first application corresponding to the first angle interval according to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the method further comprises:所述电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包含角度区间设置入口;The electronic device displays a first user interface, and the first user interface includes an angle interval setting entry;进入所述角度区间设置入口后,根据用户操作,为每个角度区间设置对应的应用。After entering the angle section to set the entrance, according to the user's operation, a corresponding application is set for each angle section.
- 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述角度区间设置入口包含第一设置入口,所述第一设置入口用于修改或删除所述角度区间与所述应用的映射关系。The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the angle interval setting entry comprises a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application.
- 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面还包括第一开关和/或第二开关;其中,The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the first user interface further comprises a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein,所述第一开关,用于根据应用的启动频率自动开启启动频次最多的应用;或者The first switch is configured to automatically start the application with the most frequently activated applications according to the activation frequency of the application; or所述第二开关,用于打开或关闭启动应用的功能。The second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一能力包含以下中的任一个:静音模式、护眼模式、省电模式和自动截屏。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first capability includes any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
- 根据权利要求1或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述电子设备启动第一能力之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 12, wherein after the electronic device activates the first capability, the method further comprises:所述电子设备显示第二提示信息,所述第二提示信息用于提示所述电子设备已开启所述第一能力。The electronic device displays second prompt information, and the second prompt information is used to prompt that the electronic device has enabled the first capability.
- 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:柔性显示屏、加速度传感器、陀螺仪传感器、一个或多个处理器,一个或多个存储器:所述柔性显示屏、所述加速度传感器、所述陀螺仪传感器、所述一个或多个存储器分别与所述一个或多个处理器耦合;An electronic device, characterized by comprising: a flexible display screen, an acceleration sensor, a gyroscope sensor, one or more processors, and one or more memories: the flexible display screen, the acceleration sensor, and the gyroscope The sensor and the one or more memories are respectively coupled with the one or more processors;所述加速度传感器和所述陀螺仪传感器,用于检测数据以使得所述一个或多个处理器 检测所述柔性显示屏的打开角度;The acceleration sensor and the gyroscope sensor are used to detect data so that the one or more processors detect the opening angle of the flexible display screen;所述柔性显示屏处于折叠形态;The flexible display screen is in a folded form;所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;所述处理器用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, where the computer program codes include computer instructions; the processor is used to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值;It is detected that the flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time during which the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle is greater than or equal to a first time threshold;启动第一应用或者,开启第一能力。Start the first application or enable the first ability.
- 根据权利要求14所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器具体用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 14, wherein the processor is specifically configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations:启动第一应用,并将所述第一应用的用户界面全屏显示或局部显示。The first application is started, and the user interface of the first application is displayed in full screen or partially.
- 根据权利要求14所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器启动第一应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 14, wherein after the processor starts the first application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:当检测到所述柔性显示屏处于展开形态时,所述电子设备将所述第一应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上全屏显示或局部显示。When detecting that the flexible display screen is in the expanded form, the electronic device displays the user interface of the first application on the flexible display screen in full screen or partially.
- 根据权利要求14至16任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器启动第一应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein after the processor starts the first application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:检测所述柔性显示屏展开第二角度,并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第二角度停顿的时间大于或等于所述第二时间阈值;其中,所述第二角度大于所述第一角度,所述第二时间阈值与所述第一时间阈值相同或不同;It is detected that the flexible display screen is expanded at a second angle, and the time for the flexible display screen to pause at the second angle is greater than or equal to the second time threshold; wherein the second angle is greater than the first angle The second time threshold is the same or different from the first time threshold;启动第二应用,所述第二应用不同于所述第一应用,或者启动第二能力,所述第二能力不同于所述第一能力。Start a second application, the second application is different from the first application, or start a second capability, the second capability is different from the first capability.
- 根据权利要求17所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器启动第二应用之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 17, wherein after the processor starts the second application, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行;或者Display the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen, and run the first application in the background; or所述电子设备将所述第一应用和所述第二应用的用户界面部分或全部显示在所述柔性显示屏。The electronic device displays part or all of the user interfaces of the first application and the second application on the flexible display screen.
- 根据权利要求18所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器将所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上进行显示,并将所述第一应用后台运行之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 18, wherein after the processor displays the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen, and runs the first application in the background, the The processor is also used to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:显示第一提示信息,所述第一提示信息用于提示所述第一应用已后台运行。The first prompt information is displayed, and the first prompt information is used to prompt that the first application is running in the background.
- 根据权利要求18所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器具体用于调用所述计 算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 18, wherein the processor is specifically configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上分屏显示;或者Displaying the user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application on the flexible display screen in separate screens; or将所述第一应用的用户界面和所述第二应用的用户界面在所述柔性显示屏上层叠显示。The user interface of the first application and the user interface of the second application are stacked and displayed on the flexible display screen.
- 根据权利要求14至20任一项所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to any one of claims 14 to 20, wherein the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations:确定所述第一角度对应的第一角度区间;Determine a first angle interval corresponding to the first angle;根据角度区间与应用之间的映射关系,确定所述第一角度区间对应的所述第一应用。According to the mapping relationship between the angle interval and the application, the first application corresponding to the first angle interval is determined.
- 根据权利要求21所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器检测到所述柔性显示屏由所述折叠形态展开第一角度;并且所述柔性显示屏在所述第一角度停顿的时间大于或等于第一时间阈值之前,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:22. The electronic device according to claim 21, wherein the processor detects that the flexible display screen is unfolded at a first angle from the folded configuration; and the time when the flexible display screen is stopped at the first angle Before being greater than or equal to the first time threshold, the processor is further configured to call the computer instructions to perform the following operations:在所述柔性显示屏上显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包含角度区间设置入口;Displaying a first user interface on the flexible display screen, the first user interface including an angle interval setting entry;进入所述角度区间设置入口后,根据用户操作,为每个角度区间设置对应的应用。After entering the angle section to set the entrance, according to the user's operation, a corresponding application is set for each angle section.
- 根据权利要求21或22所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述角度区间设置入口包含第一设置入口,所述第一设置入口用于修改或删除所述角度区间与所述应用的映射关系。The electronic device according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the angle section setting entry comprises a first setting entry, and the first setting entry is used to modify or delete the mapping relationship between the angle section and the application .
- 根据权利要求22或23所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面还包括第一开关和/或第二开关;其中,The electronic device according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the first user interface further comprises a first switch and/or a second switch; wherein,所述第一开关,用于根据应用的启动频率自动开启启动频次最多的应用;或者The first switch is configured to automatically start the application with the most frequently activated applications according to the activation frequency of the application; or所述第二开关,用于打开或关闭启动应用的功能。The second switch is used to turn on or turn off the function of starting the application.
- 根据权利要求14所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述第一能力包含以下中的任一个:静音模式、护眼模式、省电模式和自动截屏。The electronic device according to claim 14, wherein the first capability comprises any one of the following: silent mode, eye protection mode, power saving mode, and automatic screen capture.
- 根据权利要求14或25所述的电子设备,其特征在于,所述处理器启动第一能力之后,所述处理器还用于调用所述计算机指令执行以下操作:The electronic device according to claim 14 or 25, wherein after the processor activates the first capability, the processor is further configured to invoke the computer instructions to perform the following operations:在所述柔性显示屏上显示第二提示信息,所述第二提示信息用于提示所述电子设备已启动所述第一能力。Displaying second prompt information on the flexible display screen, where the second prompt information is used to prompt that the electronic device has activated the first capability.
- 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-13所述的应用打开方法。A computer storage medium, characterized by comprising computer instructions, which when the computer instructions run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to execute the application opening method according to claims 1-13.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201910819802.8 | 2019-08-31 | ||
CN201910819802.8A CN110673889A (en) | 2019-08-31 | 2019-08-31 | Application opening method in folding screen equipment and related device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021036898A1 true WO2021036898A1 (en) | 2021-03-04 |
Family
ID=69076111
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/110198 WO2021036898A1 (en) | 2019-08-31 | 2020-08-20 | Application activation method for apparatus having foldable screen, and related device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN110673889A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021036898A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN110673889A (en) * | 2019-08-31 | 2020-01-10 | 华为技术有限公司 | Application opening method in folding screen equipment and related device |
CN112835493B (en) | 2019-11-22 | 2022-07-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Screen capture display method and device and terminal equipment |
CN111258485B (en) * | 2020-01-17 | 2021-09-03 | 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 | Application program starting method and device, storage medium and terminal |
CN113542497A (en) * | 2020-03-31 | 2021-10-22 | 北京字节跳动网络技术有限公司 | Control method and device of foldable terminal, terminal and storage medium |
CN112258578B (en) * | 2020-09-28 | 2024-10-22 | 深圳数马电子技术有限公司 | Coordinate origin measuring method and device |
CN113110754A (en) * | 2021-03-31 | 2021-07-13 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Control method and electronic equipment |
CN116048245A (en) * | 2022-08-09 | 2023-05-02 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Control method and device |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101788850A (en) * | 2009-01-09 | 2010-07-28 | 三星电子株式会社 | Mobile terminal having foldable display and operation method for the same |
US20160132074A1 (en) * | 2014-11-10 | 2016-05-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
CN107589973A (en) * | 2017-08-29 | 2018-01-16 | 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 | Method and device for starting application and electronic equipment |
WO2018094976A1 (en) * | 2016-11-26 | 2018-05-31 | 华为技术有限公司 | Display method for terminal device and terminal device |
CN110058828A (en) * | 2019-04-01 | 2019-07-26 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Application program display methods, device, electronic equipment and storage medium |
CN110673889A (en) * | 2019-08-31 | 2020-01-10 | 华为技术有限公司 | Application opening method in folding screen equipment and related device |
CN111090475A (en) * | 2019-11-25 | 2020-05-01 | 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 | Application opening method, terminal and computer storage medium |
Family Cites Families (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9774721B2 (en) * | 2011-09-27 | 2017-09-26 | Z124 | LTE upgrade module |
CN103399643A (en) * | 2013-08-23 | 2013-11-20 | 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 | Application program starting method of flexible terminal and flexible terminal |
-
2019
- 2019-08-31 CN CN201910819802.8A patent/CN110673889A/en active Pending
-
2020
- 2020-08-20 WO PCT/CN2020/110198 patent/WO2021036898A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101788850A (en) * | 2009-01-09 | 2010-07-28 | 三星电子株式会社 | Mobile terminal having foldable display and operation method for the same |
US20160132074A1 (en) * | 2014-11-10 | 2016-05-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
WO2018094976A1 (en) * | 2016-11-26 | 2018-05-31 | 华为技术有限公司 | Display method for terminal device and terminal device |
CN107589973A (en) * | 2017-08-29 | 2018-01-16 | 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 | Method and device for starting application and electronic equipment |
CN110058828A (en) * | 2019-04-01 | 2019-07-26 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Application program display methods, device, electronic equipment and storage medium |
CN110673889A (en) * | 2019-08-31 | 2020-01-10 | 华为技术有限公司 | Application opening method in folding screen equipment and related device |
CN111090475A (en) * | 2019-11-25 | 2020-05-01 | 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 | Application opening method, terminal and computer storage medium |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN110673889A (en) | 2020-01-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2021175213A1 (en) | Refresh rate switching method and electronic device | |
CN114467297B (en) | Video call display method and related device applied to electronic equipment | |
WO2020259452A1 (en) | Full-screen display method for mobile terminal, and apparatus | |
CN113885759B (en) | Notification message processing method, device, system and computer readable storage medium | |
WO2020168965A1 (en) | Method for controlling electronic device having folding screen, and electronic device | |
WO2020134869A1 (en) | Electronic device operating method and electronic device | |
WO2021036898A1 (en) | Application activation method for apparatus having foldable screen, and related device | |
CN112399390B (en) | Bluetooth connection method and related device | |
WO2021000807A1 (en) | Processing method and apparatus for waiting scenario in application | |
CN111316598A (en) | Multi-screen interaction method and equipment | |
CN113923230B (en) | Data synchronization method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium | |
WO2021036585A1 (en) | Flexible screen display method and electronic device | |
WO2021115007A1 (en) | Network switching method and electronic device | |
CN113961157B (en) | Display interaction system, display method and equipment | |
WO2021036770A1 (en) | Split-screen processing method and terminal device | |
WO2021047567A1 (en) | Callback stream processing method and device | |
WO2021253975A1 (en) | Permission management method and apparatus for application, and electronic device | |
WO2020221060A1 (en) | Card-related processing method and apparatus | |
CN114125130B (en) | Method for controlling communication service state, terminal device and readable storage medium | |
CN114528581A (en) | Safety display method and electronic equipment | |
WO2021197071A1 (en) | Wireless communication system and method | |
WO2021052388A1 (en) | Video communication method and video communication apparatus | |
CN114006698B (en) | token refreshing method and device, electronic equipment and readable storage medium | |
CN110737916A (en) | Communication terminal and processing method | |
EP4443281A1 (en) | Application component management method and related device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20857779 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 20857779 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |